Bose Portable PA Knowledge - User contributions [en]

L1® System FAQ

8461-09-27T03:09:00Z

ST: formatting

<noinclude>__NOEDITSECTION__</noinclude>
<table><tr><td valign="top" width="33%">
This is the latest version of the L1® FAQs originally published in February 2008 on the [http://www.bose.com/controller?event=VIEW_STATIC_PAGE_EVENT&url=/musicians/faqs.jsp Main Bose Site]. An unofficial version is in the works that will be a superset of what is here, providing links to detailed information from users' experiences.
</td>
<td valign="top" width="33%">
'''Official Manuals, Guides, FAQs'''
* [[Documentation]]
* [[Videos|Video presentations]]
* [[Interactive Tools|Interactive Tools]] Experience the gear online
</td>
<td valign="top" width="33%">
{{BoseFAQ}}
</td>
</tr>
</table>

== L1® Systems and the Bose® approach to live sound ==
=== How does the Bose® approach to live sound work? ===
The {{L1}} system represents an entirely new approach to live amplification. In this approach, the mixer, PA speakers, monitors and backline amplifiers are replaced by special Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeakers located behind the musicians. These speakers have the unique ability to disperse sound evenly across the stage and into the audience with very little change in sound level.

The Bose approach mimics the wide sound stage of many acoustic performances: Each player has control over his or her individual sound, and a group's sound comes from multiple directions corresponding to the musicians' positions on stage. This property of acoustic music enhances our ability to hear and appreciate individual instruments and voices in ensemble passages.

=== Is this technology better suited for seasoned musicians who already have tons of gear, or for musicians who are just getting started and need a simple solution?===
{{L1}} systems are equally valuable for seasoned musicians and beginners. Experienced performers immediately recognize they can hear better and therefore play better, and they instantly appreciate the easy setup. Inexperienced musicians can spend more time playing and less time hassling with equipment. {{L1}} systems can help them develop into better players precisely because they can hear themselves and each other better. Musicians at all skill levels benefit from knowing the sound they produce on stage is the same sound that's projected to the audience.

=== Are there similarities between an {{L1}} system and line arrays currently in use? ===
Line arrays have been used for large concert performances as the PA component of a traditional amplification system. Unlike these large-venue systems, an {{L1}} system is designed as a portable implementation of a line source, positioned behind a musician?providing accurate coverage for the performer, other musicians onstage and audiences.

=== In nightclubs you normally see very large loudspeakers for bass. How do your smaller bass enclosures compare? What makes them so special? ===
Because our bass modules are used in an integrated {{L1}} system (with amplification and signal processing), performance can be enhanced in ways conventional component-based solutions can't. At the same time, the B1 bass module is modular, making it easier to produce higher bass output for instruments and styles that require it. An upright bass in a jazz trio might need only one bass module, but the electric bass in a 10-piece funk band might use four.

=== Are sound operators required with {{L1}} systems? ===
No. When musicians are in control of their own amplification with {{L1}} systems?and they know the same sound they're creating onstage is projected evenly to the audience?they're well equipped to create the desired balance of voices and instruments themselves. Without assistance from sound operators.

=== What happens if a musician is blocking the view of an {{L1}} system? Doesn't that block the sound? ===
Sound can diffract (bend) around objects. As long as a musician isn't standing directly against the {{L1}} loudspeaker, the sound diffracts around the musician and other objects like a keyboard or instrument.

=== How loud can an {{L1}} system play? ===
The new approach can compete with the maximum levels created by most conventional amplification systems. What's changed is that musicians in a band will rarely, if ever, struggle to hear themselves and each other, eliminating a major reason for excessive volume levels. With the new approach, dynamics are vastly improved, contributing greatly to musical quality. In testing at Bose, musical groups plagued by the problem of excessive loudness were delighted to find that, in one or two sessions, their average volume level had dropped drastically while their peak level remained the same. They expressed an enormous increase in the enjoyment of playing, and audiences expressed appreciation for music that was exciting but not overwhelmingly loud.

=== Is this really a "plug and play" solution? How long does it take to set up? ===
{{L1}} systems disassemble into easy-to-carry pieces. Everything can be carried by hand with no need for special equipment. The systems are also designed for easy assembly in just a few minutes. No group mixing is required with {{L1}} systems, eliminating the task of wiring instruments to a mixer, then from mixer to amplifiers and speakers. Musicians simply set up their {{L1}} systems, plug in and they're ready to play.

=== Does every musician in the band need his or her own {{L1}} system? ===
No. In some situations?a larger ensemble on a small stage, for example?testing showed that two or more musicians standing or sitting next to each other could share one {{L1}} system without a significant erosion of the benefits of the approach.

=== Can one musician use an {{L1}} system while the rest of the band plays through a conventional system? ===
Yes?there are two ways. A performer can use an {{L1}} system onstage without connecting to any other house reinforcement equipment, including stage monitors and main front speakers (or "house mains"). This allows the musician using the {{L1}} system to hear himself better and to be heard better by the other musicians onstage as well as the audience.

A performer can also use an {{L1}} system onstage while sending his or her audio
signal(s) to a house PA. In this case, the musician and the band enjoy the benefits from the {{L1}} system's sound onstage only. There are no advantages for the audience. The potential for excessive reverberation and the problems of bulky and complex equipment continue to exist when the rest of the band plays through a conventional setup.

=== Can acoustic instruments be amplified with an {{L1}} system? ===
Yes. If the acoustic instrument has a pickup system, you can connect to an {{L1}} system's power stand or into a ToneMatch® audio engine. When pickups aren't present, a microphone may be used. An {{L1}} Model I power stand is equipped with 24V phantom power capability for channels 1 and 2 to power condenser microphones. With a Model II system, use a direct box or transformer to adapt the mic cable to the power stand's 1/4" analog input connector.

=== How does this approach work for electric guitar? ===
There are three main ways an electric guitar's tone can be included in the {{L1}} system approach.
<ul>
<p><b>With a modeling amp. </b>An electric guitarist simply plugs into a modeling amp, then plugs the output of that amp into an {{L1}} system. This is the most convenient and elegant way to use electric guitar with an {{L1}} system.</p>

<p>
<b>With a preamplifier.</b> Most tube-based or solid-state guitar preamplifiers can be used with an {{L1}} system. Just plug the output of the preamp directly into the {{L1}} power stand or ToneMatch audio engine.
</p>
<p>
<b>With a traditional guitar amplifier.</b> Place a microphone in front of a traditional tube amplifier and connect the mic cable to an input on the L1. Exceptional results have been obtained with the use of low-wattage tube amplifiers— increasingly popular with players who want the tone of a tube amp without producing extremely high sound levels onstage.</p>

</ul>

The advantage gained in these methods constitutes what is arguably the most important advance in electrical guitar sound since the invention of the guitar amplifier itself: The L1® Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker overcomes the problem of uneven sound dispersion experienced with traditional guitar amps. The dispersion pattern of a typical guitar amp can be so harshly directional that the sound may be painful to listeners right in front of the amp speaker, but dull and muddy to others off to the sides. With an {{L1}} system, the sound a guitarist hears onstage is dispersed evenly and clearly throughout the audience.

=== How does the output of an {{L1}} system compare to a loud stack of guitar amplifiers and cabinets? ===
The output of an {{L1}} system can compete effectively with the output of a full stack of guitar amps and cabinets. There are additional benefits that distinguish an {{L1}} system from a full stack's acute directional beam, including the wide, even sound coverage of the Cylindrical Radiator® speaker. An {{L1}} system can also be used to amplify other instruments and voices at the same time

=== Can you create distortion for guitars with an {{L1}} system? ===
No, but you can amplify distorted sounds through an {{L1}} system. Distortion must be produced first, then fed into an {{L1}} power stand as a non-clipping signal. Key ways to do this:
<br>

<ul>

<p><b>Use inline devices.</b> Overdrive/distortion effects pedals and DSP-based amplifier modelers can be used effectively with {{L1}} systems.</p>

<p><b>Mic a guitar amplifier.</b> Mic the speaker as closely as possible. The trick here is to run the amplifier at the lowest possible level to attain the desired tone without diminishing {{L1}} system benefits. Small, low-watt amplifiers can be used onstage; louder amplifiers can be located offstage. </p>
<p>
<b>Use a loading device.</b> Some electric guitarists may prefer to use their amplifier's output as an input signal into the power stand. Before doing this, you must use a load device such as a "plate soak" or a "hot plate" to produce a line-level output suitable for the input stage of the power stand.</p>

<p>
<b>Use the line output of a guitar amplifier.</b> This option may be suitable for some guitarists. Turn the amplifier volume down so only the {{L1}} system is heard.
</p>

</ul>

=== Where can an {{L1}} system be used? ===
An {{L1}} system is suitable for amplified music performances in venues with occupancies up to 500 people. Typically this translates to maximum listener distances of about 150 feet (45 meters). The system will fill venues where the vast majority of live music performances take place, including small auditoriums, places of worship, gymnasiums, ballrooms, clubs and coffeehouses. Tests show that in larger venues, a musical group can use the {{L1}} systems onstage and enjoy the benefits of hearing themselves and each other better. Signals from the stage can then be fed to speakers that supply sound to distant seating areas.

=== Can I use the system outside? ===
<section begin="temperature" />
Yes. The system has been tested to operate in 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) temperatures; it can also be stored in -22°F to 158°F (-30°C to 70°C) temperatures. Take precautions in light rain to cover the back panel of the power stand. Keep water out of the air inlet slits inside the back panel, on the loudspeaker drivers or inside the {{L1}} cavity on the power stand.
<section end="temperature" />

=== Can DJs benefit from this system? ===
Yes, this system offers important advantages over conventional systems for DJs. One problem with portable PA systems is their stand-mounted speakers are very loud close to the speaker, and not loud enough away from it. With the L1® Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker, you can adjust for the desired volume level on the dance floor and in the audience, and then walk right up next to the speaker without it getting excessively loud—translating into much greater comfort for listeners. The system also has a sleek, elegant profile that fits nicely into event décors and minimizes sightline issues. And it's easier to transport, set up and break down than most portable PA systems.

=== Can {{L1}} systems be used as a traditional PA? ===
Yes. {{L1}} systems can be used to replace PA speakers. Their unique radiation properties help them deliver more even sound coverage and a larger stereo field?benefits confirmed in listening tests. Compact size is also an advantage for transport and rapid setup/breakdown.

=== Are {{L1}} systems prone to feedback? ===
L1 systems are resistant to feedback, but not immune from it. Putting a live mic right up against the loudspeaker, for example, will create feedback. But in the vast majority of cases, {{L1}} performance in this critical area has proven to be significantly better than the traditional use of separate backline amplifiers, monitors and PA systems.

=== Can I use two-wire Speakon® cables for the B1 bass modules? ===
No. Only four-wire Speakon cables should be used with the power stand. The additional two wires (+2 and -2) in the connector are used for sensing purposes. With the four-wire cable, the power stand can sense and adjust (EQ and level) for 0, 1 or 2 connected bass modules.

=== How can I tell if I'm using the correct four-wire Speakon cable for bass module connections? ===
When you plug a four-wire Speakon cable into an {{L1}} system while music is playing, you will clearly hear the loudspeaker mute for a moment. If you're using an incorrect cable, the momentary muting won't occur.

=== Can I connect a passive subwoofer to the bass module output? ===
No. We don't recommend connecting anything to this output except a B1 bass module, as the internal amplifier and bass module(s) are designed to properly equalize the system when connected. You may use the bass line-out connection, however, to feed a powered subwoofer or additional amplifier.

=== Can I use the bass line out to connect to a bass amplifier and cabinet? ===
Yes. The bass line-out connector provides a flat 40 Hz to 180 Hz bandpass signal when no B1 bass modules are connected. We recommend unplugging the bass modules to ensure correct EQ compensation of the bass line-out jack and phase consistency.

=== Why does the sound coming from an {{L1}} system change when I plug a 1/4" cable into the bass line-out connector? ===
L1 systems produce audio in the range of 110 Hz to 18,000 Hz when the bass line-out jack is not in use. The frequency cutoff point moves from 110 Hz to 180 Hz when you plug a cable into the bass line-out jack, accounting for the tonal change you're hearing.

See also: [[Bass Line Out / FAQ Extension]]

=== What about using just the lower half of an {{L1}} system's loudspeaker in places where the ceiling isn't tall enough for full assembly? ===
You can do it, but using only half of an {{L1}} loudspeaker will significantly impact system performance. The EQ will be incorrect, and sound coverage decreased. Plus, in order to hear yourself properly, it's best to have your ears at the same height as some part of the loudspeaker—which may be difficult unless you're seated.

See also: [[Half Stack]]

=== There's a buzz in the system. Any suggestions on how to fix it? ===
Most times, noise you hear through an {{L1}} system is caused by outboard gear and power sources, not the system itself. One of the most effective ways to alleviate buzz and hum in any system is to plug all interconnected gear into the same electrical circuit. Guitar players or vocalists with effects should plug them into the same electrical outlet as the power stand. This normally fixes all problems. A power strip may be helpful, but avoid using three-prong to two-prong adapters, also known as "cheaters" or "ground lifters." Bypassing a safety grounding mechanism is a serious safety threat.

Noise and buzzing are common problems with pro audio gear. But the new Bose approach to live sound can dramatically reduce gear noise because it uses a simple, independent system. The typical buzzes and hums associated with ground loops are eliminated when you use an independent system that's not electronically connected to other equipment.

=== Why doesn't Bose publish full system specifications for {{L1}} systems? ===
While some specifications add value when comparing two otherwise similar products, they're mostly meaningless for a product as fundamentally different as the Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker and the {{L1}} system. In addition, most specifications used to describe sound systems can be very misleading. They suggest relatively complex physical or perceptual properties can be condensed to a single or small set of numbers that defines overall quality or performance. In many cases these numbers only loosely relate to what you would experience in a real-world application. <br><br> There are also several variations in how a specific measurement can be carried out, making number comparisons useless. We believe it serves our customers better to describe {{L1}} systems in terms they can relate to more directly. We also encourage customers to experience an {{L1}} system personally, either at a demonstration or in actual real-world trials they conduct themselves.

== {{L1}} Model I Systems ==
{{:L1® Model I / FAQ}}

== {{Model II}} Systems ==
{{:L1® Model II / FAQ}}

== {{T1}} ==
{{:L1® T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine / FAQ}}
----
[[Category:FAQ]]

L1® Model I / FAQ

8461-09-27T03:09:00Z

ST: L1® Model I Documentation

__NOEDITSECTION__
<noinclude>
<table><tr>
<td valign="top" width=30%>
This is the latest version of the L1® FAQs originally published in February 2008 on the [http://www.bose.com/controller?event=VIEW_STATIC_PAGE_EVENT&url=/musicians/faqs.jsp Main Bose Site]. As a reprint of previously published material, it is not open for edits, but please use the discussion page to make note of any issues or discrepancies.</td>
<td valign="top" width="30%">'''Documentation'''
{{:L1® Model I Documentation}}</td>

<td valign="top">{{BoseFAQ}}</td>
</tr>
</noinclude>

=== What exactly are ToneMatch® presets and what are the benefits of using them? ===
Skilled studio engineers listened to the sound of specific instruments and microphones being played through an {{L1 nl}} system, made adjustments to improve the sound quality and then saved those settings as ToneMatch presets. Now the high level of tone customization most musicians experience only in recording studios is instantly available at your live performances. Sound check can be as simple as plugging in your instrument or mic and selecting the appropriate ToneMatch preset.

=== What is the proper method for setting gain on an {{Model I}} power stand? ===
There are three gain settings for the primary channels (1 and 2) and two gain settings for the secondary channels (3 and 4). To set the gain for the primary channels 1 and 2:

<ul>
<li style="list-style-type: decimal;">Adjust the input gain<br>Set the trim for the individual channel at the back panel of the power stand. Supply a maximum source signal and watch the LED. When you start to see it flash red, back off slowly on the trim knob until it flashes green again.
</li>
<br>
<li style="list-style-type: decimal;">
Adjust the channel gain with the R1 remote control<br>
With the master at zero, set the respective channel gain to 6. At this point, the LED on the remote will be at the same intensity as the LED on the back panel of the power stand. This is considered optimum gain. You then can add a bit more channel gain on the remote if it's required.
</li>
<br>
<li style="list-style-type: decimal;">
Set the remote master gain<br>The remote master knob is the last stage of gain. This knob gives you control over all four channels of the power stand.
</li>
</ul>
<p>

To set the gain for channels 3 and 4 simply adjust the input gain of the individual channel. These channels don't have indicator LEDs, but are designed for 0 dB line-level signals (e.g., from an effects device, mixer or MP3 player). Use the remote control master knob as the last stage of gain for these channels.
</p>

=== What is the recommended way to set the gain for a Model I system when using it with a T1 ToneMatch audio engine? ===
* Make sure the power switch on the power stand is in the Off position and the remote control is disconnected<br>
<i>Note: The remote should be disconnected so that the ToneMatch audio engine solely controls the volume of the {{L1 nl}} system.</i>
* Make sure the ToneMatch audio engine power switch is in the Off position and its power supply is connected
* Set the ToneMatch audio engine master volume control to 0
* Plug one end of a 1/4" phone plug cable (not supplied) into the master output port on the ToneMatch audio engine. Plug the other end of the cable into the line-in jack of channel 3 or 4 on the {{L1 nl}} power stand <br /><i>
Note: We recommend only connecting to the line inputs of channels 3 and 4 because channel 1 and 2 mic/line inputs have volume controls, equalization and presets that could affect the ToneMatch audio engine's sound and performance.</i>
* Set the line-in level control on the power stand to approximately 2 <br /><i>Note: In some circumstances, it may be necessary to slightly adjust the level of this initial setting to attain the desired gain structure.</i> Note: Bose has revised this, and now recommends setting the level control to approximately '''3'''.

See also: [[L1® Model I / FAQ Extension]]

*Turn on the ToneMatch audio engine
*Turn on the {{L1 nl}} power stand

=== Do the mic inputs have phantom power? ===
Yes. The primary input channels 1 and 2 have a button selector for +24V phantom power for microphones that require it.

=== I thought phantom power was 48 volts. Why does the power stand only supply 24 volts? ===
Phantom power is a DC voltage that powers the preamplifier of a condenser microphone. It can be in a range of 11 – 48 volts.

=== What input connections will channels 1 and 2 accept? ===
Channels 1 and 2 accept two types of input connections: a balanced XLR (mic) connection and a 1/4" phone connector unbalanced (line) input for instruments

=== Why don't channels 3 and 4 have presets, XLR inputs and line outs like channels 1 and 2? ===
The {{L1 nl}} Model I system was designed with the individual musician in mind. Primary inputs 1 and 2 are intended to receive signals from an instrument and a vocal mic. Each musician's instrument and voice can be heard through his or her own {{L1 nl}} system. The remaining channels are suitable for additional direct instruments, mixers and MP3 or CD players.

=== What are the critical frequencies (Q-points) of the remote control? ===
The mid control is centered about 1.2 KHz with a Q of approximately 1. High and low responses are shelving. We don't quote shelving frequencies because there's no clear industry standard definition of a shelf's "cutoff frequency."

=== Will an {{L1 nl}} Model I system still work without the remote control? ===
Yes, but it's not recommended. If you turn on the power stand without the remote connected, it will operate as if the remote were connected with all control knobs at the center position. Alternately, if you turn on the power stand with the remote connected and you then disconnect the remote, the power stand will retain the last settings of the remote before you disconnected it.

=== Is the remote control cable an off-the-shelf MIDI cable? Are there extensions available? ===
The remote uses a special 7-pin DIN cable commonly referred to as a "7-pin phantom MIDI cable." This cable configuration is sometimes used to connect rack-mount guitar effects to their pedals. A standard 5-pin MIDI won't work. Bose sells a 7-pin DIN (20') replacement cable.

=== Does the remote use MIDI-compatible commands? Can I automate remote functions using MIDI communications protocol? Can I customize my settings using the remote port on the power stand? ===
The remote control and associated hardware are proprietary and don't use MIDI communications protocol. The remote control port on the power stand won't function with standard MIDI products.

=== Does an {{L1 nl}} Model I system have built-in effects? ===
No. There are connectors, however, for inserting effects units into channels 1 or 2 of the power stand. These connectors require standard insert cables with 1/4" TRS connections on one end and dual male 1/4" TS connectors on the other. You may also purchase a Bose ToneMatch audio engine, which includes a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing.

=== Can I use effects equipment with the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand? ===
Channels 1 and 2 allow for a TRS line input/output connection for external effects units. Inserting the plug halfway connects to "Send;" inserting fully connects to "Return." Some musicians may prefer to keep a "dry" sound intact without the full effects loop; inserting the plug halfway into the connector will maintain the original signal and not route the channel solely through the effects module. You can use either a serial or parallel connection for effects units, as detailed in the owner's guide. In addition, you may also use a Bose T1 ToneMatch audio engine with an {{L1 nl}} system. It features a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing.

=== How can I add more inputs to my system? ===
Use our multichannel {{T1}}, specifically designed for {{L1 nl}} systems. It offers three mic/line inputs, two line inputs (L/R), our largest library of ToneMatch presets, proprietary zEQ and a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing. Simply connect the ToneMatch audio engine via an analog 1/4" TS cable from its master output to channel 3 or 4 of the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand.

=== What's the "data out" connector for? ===
This is a SPDIF connection for digital recording of channels 1 and 2. It runs at a sample rate of 48 kHz. Channels 3 and 4 aren't included in this output.


<noinclude>
= Previous version of the Model I FAQ =
[[Image:L1doubleWA1.gif|L1 Double B1 with A1|right]]
<table><tr>
<td valign="top" width=50%>
This information originally appeared on the main {{Bose}}
website: http://www.bose.com/musicians/ and appears here with permission from {{Bose}}. As a reprint of previously published material, it is not open for edits, but please use the discussion page to make note of any issues or discrepancies.</td>
<td valign="top">{{BoseFAQ}}</td>

</tr></table>

<br>
'''Focus Categories'''

[[{{PAGENAME}}#The_Technology|The Technology]] | [[{{PAGENAME}}#General_(Product)|General Product]] | [[{{PAGENAME}}#Functionality|Functionality]] | [[{{PAGENAME}}#Applications|Applications]]
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#The L1® Product Family|The L1® Product Family]]
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Support|Support]]

==The Technology==

=== What is the {{L1 nl}} Model I system? ===

The {{L1 nl}} Model I system represents a new approach to amplification. This approach was designed to address the root cause of complaints by musicians and audience members regarding the quality of live amplified musical performances.

=== How does this approach work? ===

In the new approach mixer, PA speakers, monitors and backline amplifiers (e.g. guitar amps) are replaced by special Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeakers, which are located behind the musicians. These speakers have the unique ability to radiate sound evenly across the stage and into the audience with very little change in sound level.

The approach is naturalistic in that it mimics an acoustic instrument performance: Each player has control over his or her individual sound, and the sound comes from the multiple directions that correspond to the musician<nowiki>’</nowiki>s positions on stage – a property of acoustic music known to enhance our ability to hear and appreciate individual instruments and voices in ensemble passages. The new approach has many integrated features that allow the user to set up the system in just minutes.

=== Is this technology better-suited for seasoned musicians who already have tons of gear, or for musicians who are just getting started and need a simple solution? ===

The system is equally valuable for the seasoned musician and the beginner. Experienced performers immediately will recognize that they can hear better and therefore play better, and they instantly appreciate the easy setup. Musicians who are starting will enjoy playing more because they<nowiki>’</nowiki>ll spend

more time playing and less time hassling with equipment. They will develop as better players because they can hear themselves and each other. All will benefit from the knowledge that the sound they produce on stage is what is radiated to the audience. Never again will they hear and think one thing, only to find out the audience heard something completely different when they asked "How did we sound?" after the performance.

=== What is the concept behind ToneMatch™ presets, and what are the benefits? ===

ToneMatch™ presets make it easy to get exceptional amplified tone from any voice or instrument when used with Bose® {{L1 nl}} portable line array systems. When you select a proprietary ToneMatch preset for your microphone or instrument, you are tapping into a powerful new technology available only from Bose. A skilled studio engineer listened to the sound of your instrument being played through an L1 system, made adjustments to improve the sound quality and then saved those settings as a ToneMatch preset.

Now the high level of tone customization that most musicians experience only in a recording studio is available on stage at your live performances. Sound check can be as simple as plugging in your instrument or microphone and selecting the appropriate ToneMatch preset.

=== Are there similarities between the {{L1 nl}} Model I system and line arrays currently in use? ===

Line arrays have been used for large concert performances as the PA component of a traditional triple amplification system. Unlike these large-venue systems, the {{L1 nl}} Model I system is designed as a portable implementation of a line or pole-shaped source. It is designed to be positioned behind each musician, providing accurate coverage for musicians and audiences.

=== In nightclubs, you normally see very large loudspeakers for bass. How do your smaller bass enclosures compare? What makes them so special? ===

Bose has a number of propriety technologies for bass and has a long history of developing systems that produce high output in the bass range from smaller enclosures. The B1 bass module is no exception. The fact that it is used in an integrated system (with amplification and signal processing) means that performance can be enhanced in ways that a conventional component-based solution cannot. Large signal performance, for example, can be greatly improved with the use of a dedicated digital signal processor, which is built into the Model I power stand.

At the same time, the B1 bass module has been made modular, so that higher bass output can be created for instruments and styles that require it. An upright bass in a jazz trio might use only one bass module. On the other extreme, the electric bass in a 10-piece funk band might use four.

== General (Product) ==

=== What is the 45-day Better Music Guarantee? ===

At Bose, we recognize that customers may want to experience the {{L1 nl}} system in their own environment with their specific gear. That is why we allow you to purchase and use the system in your specific application for up to 45 days, and if for any reason you are not satisfied you may return it for a refund. This offer is exclusive to Bose® direct sales channels.

=== Does Bose plan to add to the {{L1 nl}} product family? ===

In the spring of 2007, Bose announced the introduction of the {{L1 nl}} Model II system. This system has many similarities to the {{L1 nl}} Model I and features the introduction of the {{T1 nl}}. To learn more about the benefits and features of {{L1 nl}} Model II system please visit [http://www.bose.com/musicians www.Bose.com/musicians].

=== I already own an {{L1 nl}} Model I or Model II system. Can I purchase the T1 separately and use it with the system? ===

Yes. The T1 is available for purchase separately and may be used with either an {{L1 nl}} Model I or Model II system. When used with a Model II system, the audio is connected digitally via the ToneMatch™ ports. When used with a Model I, a separate power supply is required to power the T1 and the audio is analog. When using with a Model I, simply connect the T1<nowiki>’</nowiki>s Master Output jack to the analog input of Channel 3 or 4 on the Model I power stand. The T1 power supply is available through Bose or authorized dealers of the L1 family of products.

=== When will additional products be added to the {{L1 nl}} product family? ===

We do not publicly discuss new products before their launch date. Our engineers and marketing staff are always researching new solutions for musicians, and we are dedicated to offering products of enduring value.

=== Are hard-shell cases available for the products? ===

No. Although Bose does not offer hard shell cases directly, visit [http://www.bose.com/musicians www.Bose.com/musicians] to view user comments on this topic. (Or see [[Hardshell Cases]] in this wiki).

=== What is the limited warranty? ===

{{#lst:Warranty Information|{{L1 nl}} Model I}}

=== What are the weights and dimensions of the {{L1 nl}} Model I system? ===
==== Weight ====

* {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand: 35 lb (16 kg)
* {{L1 nl}} Model I Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker
** Top Section: 14.5 lb (6 kg)
** Bottom Section: 16.0 lb (7 kg)
* R1 remote control: 0.6 lb (0.27 kg)
* B1 bass module (optional): 28 lb (13 kg)
==== Dimensions ====
* L1 Model I power stand: 26.0<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 26.0<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D x 5.0<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H (66 cm x 66 cm x 12.7 cm)
* {{L1 nl}} Model I Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker (each section):
** Top Section: 43 1/8<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H x 3.5<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 4.0<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D (109.54 cm x 8.89 cm x 10.1 cm)
** Bottom Section: 43 1/2<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H x 3.5<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 4.0<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D (110.49 cm x 8.89 cm x 10.1 cm x )
* R1 remote control: 2.8<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 5.6<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D x 1.6<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H (4.0 cm x 7.1 cm x 14.1 cm)
* B1 bass module: 15.3<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H x 10.3<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 18.0<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D (38.0 cm x 25.0 cm x 45.7 cm)

=== What is the fully assembled height of the {{L1 nl}} Model I system? ===
82-3/4 <nowiki>’’</nowiki> (210.2 cm)

Note: The bayonet portion of the upper section of the {{L1 CR}} is included in the individual measurements but not in the overall system height. Similarly, the lower section of the {{L1 CR}} fits into the power stand and that portion is not included in the overall system height.

== Functionality ==

=== Is this really a "plug and play" solution? How long does it take to set up? ===

The {{L1 nl}} Model I system is designed to disassemble into easy-to-carry pieces. Everything can be carried by hand without the need for special equipment. Moreover, the products are designed to assemble in just minutes, and because the approach requires no mixing, the complex task of wiring each instrument to the mixer and then from the mixer to the amplifiers and speakers is eliminated. The musicians simply plug in, and they<nowiki>’</nowiki>re ready to play.

=== Are sound operators required in the new approach? ===

No. Just as acoustic-instrument ensembles (such as a string quartet) are able to balance their own sound, so too can a group playing amplified music using the new approach. The reason is that when musicians are in total control and know that the sound they are creating on stage is what is radiated outward to the audience, they are best-suited to creating the required balance of voices and instruments.

=== What happens if a musician is blocking the view of the {{L1 nl}} Model I system? Doesn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t that block the sound? ===

Sound diffracts (bends) around objects. So long as the musician is not standing literally against the {{L1 nl}} Model I system, the sound diffracts around the musician or other objects such as a keyboard or other musical instrument.

=== What is the proper method for setting gain on the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand? ===

There are three gain settings for the primary channels (1 and 2) and two gain settings for the

secondary channels (3 and 4).

'''To set the gain for the primary channels (1 or 2):'''

1) Adjust the input gain. Set the trim for the individual channel at the back panel of the power stand. Supply a maximum source signal and watch the LED. When you start to see it flash red, back off slowly on the trim knob until it flashes green again.

2) Adjust the channel gain with the R1 remote control. With the master at zero, set the respective channel gain to 6. At this point, the LED on the remote will be at the same intensity as the LED on the back panel of the power stand. This is considered optimum gain. The musician then can add a bit more from the R1 remote control if it is required.

3) The R1 remote control MASTER knob is the last stage of gain. This knob gives you control over all four channels of the power stand.

=== What is the recommended gain staging for Model I systems when using with a T1? ===

1. Make sure the '''Power '''switch on the power stand is in the OFF position and the R1 remote control is disconnected.

'''Note:''''' The R1 remote control should be disconnected so that the {{T1 nl}} solely controls the volume of the {{L1 nl}} Model I system.''

2. Make sure the T1 power switch is in the OFF position and the T1 audio engine power supply is connected.

3.''' '''Make sure the T1''' Master '''volume control is set to '''0'''.

4. Plug one end of a ¼" phone plug cable (not supplied) into the '''Master '''output port on the T1. Plug the other end of the ¼" phone plug cable into the Channel 3 (or Channel 4) Line IN jack on the L1 power stand.

5. Set the Line IN '''Level '''control on the power stand to approximately '''2'''. NOTE: This setting has been revised to '''3''' or '''4''' ref: [[T1_ToneMatch%E2%84%A2_Audio_Engine#Power_Stand_Input_Setting|T1 ToneMatch™ Audio Engine: Power Stand Input Setting]]

6. Turn on the T1 audio engine.

7. Turn on the L1 Model I power stand.

'''Note:''''' In some circumstances, it may be necessary to slightly adjust the Line IN '''Level '''control from this initial setting to attain the desired gain structure.''

Because the Channel 1 and 2 Mic/Line inputs on the power stand have volume controls, equalization and ToneMatch™ presets that could affect the sound and performance of a T1, we only recommend connecting to the Channel 3 and 4 line inputs.

Adjusting gain for Channels 3 or 4

1) Adjust the input gain of the individual channel. These channels do not have indicator LEDs but

are designed for 0 dB line level signals, such as from an effects device, mixer or CD player.

2) As above, the R1 remote control MASTER knob is the last stage of gain. This knob gives control over all four channels of the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand.

=== Can I use the Bass - Line OUT on the {{L1 nl}} Model I system to connect to a bass amplifier and cabinet? ===

The bass-line-out connector provides a flat 40-Hz to 180-Hz bandpass signal when no B1 bass modules are connected. We recommend unplugging the B1 bass modules to ensure correct EQ compensation of the Bass - Line OUT jack and phase consistency.

=== Is the R1 remote control cable an off-the-shelf cable? Is this a standard MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) cable? Are there extensions available? ===

The remote uses a special 7-pin DIN cable commonly referred to as "7-Pin Phantom MIDI Cable." This cable configuration is sometimes used to connect rack-mount guitar effects to their pedals. A standard 5-pin MIDI will not work. Bose sells the 7-pin DIN (20-foot) replacement cable. For those customers needing a little extra distance from their power stand to their R1 remote control, Hosa Technology, Inc., manufactures 25-foot cables. These sell at [http://www.musiciansfriend.com/ www.MusiciansFriend.com] (Product #333039). Coupler adapters are not available.

=== Does the R1 remote control use MIDI-compatible commands? Can I automate remote functions using MIDI communications protocol? Can I customize my settings using the remote control port on the power stand? ===

No. The R1 remote control and associated hardware is proprietary and does not use MIDI communications protocol. This port will not function with standard MIDI products.

=== Will the unit still work without the R1 remote control? ===

Yes. The power stand continuously senses activity at all preset selectors and what is connected at the input/output jacks. In general, it is not recommended to operate without the remote connected. However, the power stand can function without the R1 remote control. If you power the power stand on without the R1 remote control connected, it will operate as if the R1 remote control was connected and at a fixed setting of 12 o<nowiki>’</nowiki>clock (center position) on all the control knobs. Alternatively, if the unit is powered on with the R1 remote control first connected and the user then disconnects the R1 remote control, it will retain the last settings of the R1 remote control before you disconnected it. This is helpful in the case where sharing may be necessary.

=== Do the mic inputs have phantom power? ===

Yes. The primary input channels (Channels 1 and 2) have a button selector for <nowiki>+</nowiki>24V phantom power for microphones that require that feature.

=== I thought phantom power was 48 volts? Why does the power stand only supply 24 volts? ===

Phantom power is a DC voltage that powers the preamplifier of a condenser microphone.

Phantom power can be in a range of 11-48 volts.

=== How many B1 bass modules can you connect? ===

One power stand using an {{L1 nl}} Model I system can power up to two B1 bass modules.

=== Can this product be used in other countries? ===

There are two voltage versions of the power stand and the A1 PackLite® amplifier. 120V versions are available in the U.S., Canada and some Latin American countries. The 230V versions are available in Europe and Australia. Please visit www.Bose.com/musicians for up-to-date information about product availability.

=== How do I know which half of the Cylindrical Radiator® to insert into the power stand first? ===

The upper and lower halves of the {{L1 nl}} Model I system are not identical. The bottom half is easily identifiable because it has a large end cap, which gets inserted first into the power stand. The upper half contains the Bose® logo and uses a tongue-and-groove mechanism to ensure a solid mechanical and electrical connection to the lower half. Both halves are clearly labeled on the back, indicating proper insertion.

=== Can you use 2-wire Speakon® cables for the B1 bass modules? ===

No. Only 4-wire Speakon® cables should be used with the power stand. The additional two wires (<nowiki>+</nowiki>2 and -2) in the connector are used for sensing purposes. Upon connection, the power stand is able to sense and adjust (EQ and level) for 0, 1 or 2 B1 bass modules connected to the bass module Out Speakon® connector.

=== What is the Data IN connector used for? ===

The Data IN connector is used for updating product software.

=== Can the customer update the power stand? ===

Yes. The customer can update the presets in the power stand. For more information about upgrading presets, please visit www.Bose.com/musicians.

=== How can I tell if I<nowiki>’</nowiki>m using the correct Speakon® cable? ===

If you plug in a 4-wire Speakon® cable to the Bass-Amp 3 OUT connector with music playing through, you will clearly hear the {{L1 nl}} Model I system mute for a moment. If you are using an incorrect cable, such as a 2-wire Speakon® cable, the momentary muting will not occur.

=== Why does the sound coming from the {{L1 nl}} Model I system change when plug in a ¼-inch plug into the Bass - Line OUT connector? ===

The {{L1 nl}} Model I system receives its audio signal from the power stand. The signal is customized by the internal DSP unit according to what other devices are connected to the power stand, such as how many B1 bass modules and/or amplifiers are connected to the Bass - Line OUT connector. The {{L1 nl}} Model I system when used alone with the power stand produces audio in the range of 110 Hz to 18, 000 Hz. When the Bass - Line OUT connector is in use the frequency cutoff point is moved from 110 Hz to 180 Hz, it will not play any frequencies below 180 Hz. The Bass - Line OUT connector sends a flat bandpass signal from 40 to 180 Hz to external amplifiers that may be used for extended low frequency reinforcement.

=== What<nowiki>’</nowiki>s the sample rate of the Data OUT connector? The owners<nowiki>’</nowiki> manual only mentions "Channel 1/2 digital output." ===

The Data OUT connector is a SPDIF connection for digital recording of both Channels 1 and 2. It runs at a sample rate of 48 kHz. Channels 3 and 4 are not included in this output.

=== Why don<nowiki>’</nowiki>t Channels 3 and 4 have presets, XLR inputs and line outs like Channels 1 and 2? ===

The {{L1 nl}} Model I system was designed with an individual in mind, as an extension of your musical instruments. For this, we have provided two primary inputs, 1 and 2. These inputs were intended to receive signal from an instrument, such as a guitar or keyboard, and a voice. Each musician<nowiki>’</nowiki>s instrument and voice can be heard from his or her own system. The remaining channels, though still suitable for direct instruments, can be used for CD background music for playback in between performance sets.

=== I need more inputs. How do I plug in all my instruments? ===

For some multi-instrumentalists, there may not be enough input connectors. Musicians who require additional inputs can purchase a {{T1 nl}}. The T1 is a powerful multichannel audio device designed for use with {{L1 nl}} Model I and Model II systems. It contains our largest library of ToneMatch™ presets, proprietary zEQ, and a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing.

The T1 was designed with the needs of musicians in mind. This makes for a completely integrated and powerful unit that is easy to use and alleviates many challenges associated with live performances. When the T1 is used with the Model I system, the audio connects via an analog ¼" TS cable from the Master Output of the T1 into Channel 3 or 4 of the power stand.

=== Does the {{L1 nl}} Model I system have built-in effects? ===

No. While the system does not have built-in effects, there are connectors for inserting effects units into Channel 1 or Channel 2 of the power stand. This requires a standard insert cable, which has a ¼" TRS connection on one end and dual male ¼" TS connectors on the other end.

Additionally, you may purchase a {{T1 nl}}, which includes a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing.

=== Can you use effects equipment with the power stand? ===

Yes. Both Channels 1 and 2 allow for a TRS line input/output connection for external effects processors. Inserting the plug halfway connects to "Send"; inserting fully connects to "Return." Some musicians may prefer to keep a "dry" sound intact without the full effects loop. Inserting the plug halfway into the connector will maintain the original signal and not route the channel solely through the effects module.

'''Using a serial effects connection with the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand'''

'''Note'''''''':''' Connecting an effects unit in serial requires a TRS split "insert" cable (with a ¼-inch TRS connector on one side and two mono ¼-inch phone connectors on the other). This type of cable is readily available at most musical instrument stores and on the Internet.''

1. Insert the TRS plug into the '''Channel 1''' Insert jack on the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand.

2. Connect the ¼-inch mono plug (labeled "send," "ring" or ""right") to the input of the effects processor.

3. Connect the other ¼-inch mono plug (labeled "return," "tip" or "left") to the output of the effects processor.

4. Adjust the effects level and mix of the effects processor.

'''Note:''' ''A very high output from the effects processor can overload the input of the L1 Model I power stand. If the '''LED''' on the remote turns red, even if the channel '''LEVEL '''control on the R1 remote control is below the 12 o<nowiki>’</nowiki>clock position, reduce the output level of your effects processor.''

'''Note:''' ''The effects processor does interrupt the audio path. This may result in no audio output if the effects processor is turned off. To use a "clean" signal, do not turn the effects processor off, but put it in bypass mode.''

'''Using parallel effects connection with the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand'''

'''Note:''' Connecting an effects unit in parallel requires one ¼-inch ''unbalanced'' (instrument) cable, one mono ¼-inch phone (M) to dual mono ¼-inch phone (F) "Y" cable adapter, and one TRS split "insert" cable (with a ¼-inch TRS connector on one side and two mono ¼-inch phone connectors on the other).

1. Insert the TRS plug into the '''Channel 1 Insert''' jack on the {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand.

2. Connect both ¼-inch plugs from the "insert" cable into both receptacles on the "Y" cable adapter.

3. Connect the plug of the "Y" cable adapter into the input of the effects processor.

4. Connect the ¼-inch unbalanced (instrument) cable from the output of the effects

processor to '''Channel 3 Line IN''' of the L1 Model I power stand.

5. Set the effects level of the processor to full and turn the mix level of the effects processor to full "wet."

6. Adjust the '''Channel 3 Level control''' of the L1 Model I power stand for the desirable effects mix.

=== What inputs connectors will Channels 1 and 2 accept? ===

Channels 1 and 2 accept two types of input connections: a balanced XLR (mic) connection, and a ¼-inch phone connector unbalanced (line) input for passive instruments such as guitar.

=== What are the critical frequencies (Q-points) of the R1 remote control? ===

The MID control is centered about 1.2 KHz with a Q of approximately 1. HIGH and LOW responses are shelving. We are reluctant to quote shelving frequencies because there is no clear industry standard definition of a shelf<nowiki>’</nowiki>s "cutoff frequency."

=== Can I use the system outside? ===

Yes. You can use your system for outdoor gigs. The system has been tested to operate in 0°C to 50°C temperatures and be stored in -30°C to 70°C temperatures. In cases of light rain outside, take precautions to cover the back panel of the power stand. Water must not get into the air inlet slits inside the back panel, on the loudspeaker drivers or inside the {{L1 nl}} cavity on the power stand.

Unofficial FAQ Extension:
{{#lst:Temperature|conversions}}

=== There is a buzz in the system. Any suggestions on how to fix it? ===

Noise and buzzing are typical problems with pro audio gear. The new Bose® approach is very much immune to noise because it is a simple, independent system. The typical buzzes and hums associated with ground loops are gone when you use an independent system that is not interconnected electronically to other pieces of equipment. This is not a comprehensive guide to noise troubleshooting, but will offer a suggestion. One of the most important suggestions to alleviate buzz and hum in a system is to plug all interconnected gear into the same electrical circuit. Guitar players or vocalists with effects should plug those units into the same electrical outlet as their power stand is plugged into. This normally fixes all problems. Do not use 3-prong to 2-prong adapters, also known as "cheaters" or "ground lifters." Bypassing a safety grounding mechanism is a serious safety threat.

=== Why doesn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t Bose Corporation publish full system specifications? ===

Most of the specifications that are used to describe sound systems can be very misleading.

They pretend that relatively complex physical or perceptual properties can be condensed to a single number (or a small set of numbers) that determines somehow the quality of a product. These numbers then are used to compare or rank different products. In many cases, these numbers only loosely relate to what a user would experience in a real-world application. Furthermore, there are quite a number of variations in the details of how a specific measurement can be carried out. We believe it serves our customers better to describe the product in terms that they can more directly relate to, and to enable and encourage our customers to experience the product directly either through a demonstration or through actual real-world trials they conduct themselves.

Bose Corporation publishes technical data whenever we think it is helpful. For example, for our products that are used primarily in installed sound systems, detailed technical specifications are available. This data is normally used by professional sound system engineers, who are well-trained to interpret the data correctly and put it into the right context. While some specifications add value in comparing two products that are otherwise very similar, they are mostly meaningless for a product that is fundamentally different, such as the Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker and the Bose {{L1 nl}} Model I system.

=== How prone is the system to feedback? ===

The {{L1 nl}} Model I system is resistant to, but not immune from, feedback. Its performance in this critical dimension has been shown, in the vast majority of cases, to be significantly better than the traditional triple system amplification approach of backline instrument amplifiers, monitor system and PA system.

=== Can I connect a passive subwoofer to the Bass Module Output? ===

No. We do not recommend that you connect anything except the B1 bass module to this output, as the internal amplifier and B1 bass module(s) are designed to properly equalize the system when connected. However, you may utilize the '''Bass Line Out''' connection to feed a powered subwoofer or additional amplifier.

== Applications ==

=== Where can the {{L1 nl}} Model I system be used? ===

The {{L1 nl}} Model I system is suitable for amplified music performances in venues with occupancies up to 500 people. Typically, this translates to maximum listener distances of about 150 feet (45 meters). Thus the system will fill auditoriums, places of worship, gymnasiums, ballrooms, dance clubs, coffeehouses and more – places where the vast majority of live music performances take place. Furthermore, tests have been conducted that show that in larger venues, a musical group can use the new approach on stage and enjoy all the benefits that allow musicians to hear themselves and each other better. Signals from the stage can then be fed to speakers that supply sound to distant seating areas.

=== What kinds of musical groups can use the new technology? ===

There are no restrictions in this regard. Any instrument, any group size and any genre will benefit from the advantages of hearing themselves better, of being in complete control of their music, of having their audiences hear them better, and of being able to set up and play in a small fraction of the time it takes to set up a conventional system.

=== You talk about excessive loudness. Are you saying the new system isn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t capable of playing loud? How loud can it play? ===

The new approach can compete with the maximum levels created by most conventional systems. What<nowiki>’</nowiki>s changed is that a band will rarely, if ever, play at the kind of sustained or persistently high sound levels, because the struggle to hear oneself and one<nowiki>’</nowiki>s fellow musicians – the reason to increase the volume in the first place – is gone. With the new approach, therefore, the dynamics are vastly improved, one of the major contributors to musical quality. In testing at Bose, musical groups plagued by the problem of excessive loudness were delighted to find that within a very short time (one or two sessions), their average level had dropped drastically while their peak level remained the same. They expressed an enormous increase in the enjoyment of playing, and audiences expressed their appreciation of music that was exciting but not overwhelmingly loud.

=== Does every musician in the band need his or her own {{L1 nl}} Model I system? ===

No. In the fullest embodiment of this new approach, each musician in a group has a {{L1 nl}} Model I system. In some situations – a larger ensemble on a small stage, for example – testing showed that two or more musicians could share one {{L1 nl}} Model I system without a significant erosion of the benefits of the concept when the musicians were standing or sitting directly next to each other. Two horn players standing side by side or three support vocalists standing next to each other can use one L1 Model I system, as an example.

=== Can one musician use an {{L1 nl}} system while the rest of the band plays through a conventional system? ===

Yes. There are two ways that a musician can use the {{L1 nl}} Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker onstage with a band using the conventional triple system setup.

A performer can use the system onstage without connecting to any other house reinforcement equipment, including the main front speakers (sometimes known as "house mains") and stage monitors. However, only some of the benefits of the new approach are enjoyed in this case.

The musician using the {{L1 nl}} Model II system will hear him or herself better, will be heard better
by the other musicians and will be heard better by the audience. However, the full potential of this new system is not realized because only the performer and not the complete band is equipped and engaged to perform with the benefits of this new amplification approach.

Performers can also use {{L1 nl}} Model II systems to enhance their sound onstage, and use the available Line Output jacks on the primary channels to send the audio signal(s) to a house PA. In this case, the musician and the band enjoy the benefits from the musician<nowiki>’</nowiki>s sound onstage and only onstage. There are no advantages for the audience. Loss of the benefits of the "cocktail party" effect, lack of eye-ear coordination, the potential for excessive reverberation, and the problems of bulky and complex equipment all exist if the remainder of the band plays through a triple system.

=== Can DJs use this system? ===

Yes. The system has important advantages over conventional systems. One problem with portable

PA systems is the use of stand-mounted speakers, which are very loud close to the speaker and not loud enough away from the speaker. The {{L1 nl}} Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker is unusual in that you can adjust for the desired level on the dance floor and in the audience, and then walk literally right next to the speaker without it getting excessively loud. This translates into much greater comfort for the guests.

The system also has a sleek, elegant profile that fits nicely into event décors and minimizes sight-line issues.

=== Can {{L1 nl}} systems be used as a traditional PA system? ===

Yes. {{L1 nl}} Model I systems can be used to replace PA speakers. Their unique radiation properties help them deliver more even sound coverage and a larger stereo field – a benefit that has been confirmed in listening tests. The benefits of compactness for transportation and rapid assembly will also be enjoyed.

=== Can musicians really mix themselves? ===

Yes, when they are in complete control of their sound. Musicians know how to play together acoustically and have done so countless times, regardless of whether they also play with amplification. All musicians know how to alter their playing in order to create a balance when playing with others. In extensive testing at Bose, it was found that this skill is quickly revived when using the {{L1 nl}} system.

=== Does this approach work for electric guitar? Aren<nowiki>’</nowiki>t guitarists particular about their guitar amplifiers? ===

Yes. For most electric guitarists, the guitar amplifier is considered a part of their instrument, as

inseparable from the sound of their instrument as is the wood and body shape of an acoustic

guitar. For example, the distortion created by the electronic tubes in some guitar amplifiers

produces tones essential to many guitarists<nowiki>’</nowiki> sound. Even the speaker transducers and speaker cabinets used in guitar amplifiers produce unique tone essential to some players<nowiki>’</nowiki> sound.

=== How can these elements of the electric guitar<nowiki>’</nowiki>s tone be included in the {{L1 nl}} system approach? ===

There are at least three ways this can be done, and each has been extensively tested by

guitarists participating in the Bose® research that led to the new approach. The advantage gained

in these approaches constitutes what is arguably the most important gain in electrical guitar

sound since the invention of the guitar amplifier itself. The reason is that the Cylindrical

Radiator® loudspeaker overcomes the problem of uneven radiation of sound to the stage and

audience from traditional guitar amplifiers. This is of particular interest for the electric

guitar because the radiation pattern of typical guitar amplifiers is so harshly directional as to be

painful to listeners on-axis, and dull and muddy off-axis. Before, guitarists could create the

desired "sweet spot" sound in one location (theirs), while all others were blasted on-axis or

couldn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t hear the detail well off-axis.

1) A number of companies have in the past 10 years produced electronic devices that model

the tone produced by tubes, guitar transducers and guitar amplifier speaker cabinets. These

modeling amps initially helped to solve the problem of recording electric guitar and have become increasingly popular on stage. The electric guitarist simply plugs into one of these devices and the output of the device is then plugged into the {{L1 nl}} Model II system. This is the most convenient and elegant way to use electric guitar with the L1 system.

2) One of a number of tube-based or solid-state guitar preamplifiers can be used. The output of these preamplifiers is plugged directly into the power stand.

3) The third way is for purists who are not satisfied that the modeling amps (first solution above)

capture all of the nuances of a traditional guitar amplifier. These guitarists can use a tube

amplifier with a microphone in front of the amplifier. Exceptional results have been obtained with

the use of one of a growing number of low-wattage tube amplifiers. This class of guitar amplifier is

becoming popular with players who want the tone of a tube amplifier but do not want to produce

extremely high sound levels in order to get that tone.

=== How does the output of an {{L1 nl}} Model I system compare to a loud stack of guitar amplifiers and cabinets? ===

The full stack is considered a standard by many guitarists, both in terms of tone and output.

An {{L1 nl}} Model I system can compete effectively with the output of a full stack. However, there are other benefits, such as the radiation pattern of the L1 Model I system, that distinguish it from the full stack<nowiki>’</nowiki>s acute directional beam. Moreover, the Model I system can be used to amplify other instruments at the same time. The full stack is for one thing only: electric guitar.

=== Can you create distortion for guitars with the {{L1 nl}} system? ===

No. Distortion must be produced first and then fed into the power stand as a clean, non-clipping signal. To achieve distortion, the guitarist can use a few methods:

- Inline devices: One popular method would be to use any of the effects pedals on the market or use a DSP-based amplifier modeler, such as the Line 6 "Pod," which models the tone produced by amplifier tubes, guitar transducers and guitar amplifier speaker cabinets.

- Miking a guitar amplifier: Another method would be to use a guitar amplifier and mic the speaker as closely as possible. The trick here is to run the amplifier at the lowest possible level at which the correct tone is attainable but does not diminish the benefits of the {{L1 nl}} Model I system. Louder amplifiers can be located and miked offstage. Miking small, low-watt amplifiers is a better technique for this method.

- Use a loading device. Some electric guitarists may prefer to use their amplifier<nowiki>’</nowiki>s output as an input signal into the power stand. Before doing this, they must use a load device such as a "Plate Soak" or a

"Hot Plate" to give a line-level output suitable for the input stage of the power stand.

- Use the "line output" of a guitar amplifier. Some amplifiers have this option and may be suitable for some guitarists. The only suggestion here is to turn the volume of the amplifier down so only the {{L1 nl}} Model I system is heard.

<br>Refer to the Bose® website and Musicians Community Forum at http://www.Bose.com/musicians to learn how to interface additional instruments with the system.

=== Can acoustic instruments be amplified with the {{L1 nl}} Model I system? ===

Yes. If the acoustic instrument has a pickup system, then you may connect directly into the system. In cases where pickups are not present, a microphone may be used. The Model I power stand is equipped with 24 v phantom power capability for Channels 1 and 2 to power condenser microphones.

=== How many B1 bass modules can I stack up on stage or when transporting? ===

Up to four B1 bass modules may be stacked in a column using the integrated alignment tabs on the sides of the enclosures.

=== Where can I collaborate with Bose staff and existing owners to learn more on how the {{L1 nl}} Model I system can work for my specific application? ===

We host a public forum that allows our helpful user community to share their experiences and collaborate in real time on topics that are important to them. You will find extensive application specific documentation and helpful hints. The forum is fully searchable and can be accessed at [http://bose.infopop.cc/6/ubb.x http://Bose.infopop.cc/6/ubb.x].

You also may contact our product support team and speak with our knowledgeable staff of musicians. They may be reached at 877-335-2673.

== The {{L1 nl}} Product Family ==

=== When was the {{L1 nl}} Model I system first available for consumers to purchase? ===

On October 15, 2003, Bose Corporation began selling the {{L1 nl}} Model I family of products through our internal CFDT sales division, and [http://www.bose.com/ www.Bose.com] (in the U.S., Puerto Rico, Canada or U.S. Virgin Islands only). Guitar Center® and Musicians Friend® began selling these products on November 1, 2003, in stores nationwide.

=== Do the new products compete with Bose<nowiki>’</nowiki>s other portable professional systems? ===

There are some situations where in the past we would have recommended a Bose® solution comprised of our other portable products, where today we would recommend the {{L1 nl}} Model II system instead. Live music performance is the most obvious application where we would do so. There remain a number of applications where our other portable products are an excellent choice.

=== Where can you hear and try the {{L1 nl}} Model I system? ===

Order it and try it for 45 days directly from Bose Corporation. We encourage customers to experience the {{L1 nl}} in their own environment with their specific gear. That is why we offer the ability for you to purchase and use the system in your specific application for up to 45 days, and if for any reason you are not satisfied you may return it for a refund. This offer is exclusive to Bose® direct sales channels.

Additionally, you easily can try out the product at Guitar Center® stores nationwide. Other methods of demonstration are available in North America. For more details, visit [http://www.bose.com/musicians www.Bose.com/musicians].

=== How does the cost of the {{L1 nl}} Model I compare to traditional PA equipment? ===

Because of the enormous reduction in complexity, the new system compares favorably with the cost of a high-quality conventional amplification system for a four piece band. However, the enormous reduction in transportation and set up costs mean that the new system is much less expensive to own and operate. Superiority is achieved when this cost advantage is combined with what we feel is a quantum improvement in sound quality.

=== What do the different salable packages include in the box? ===

The {{L1 nl}} Model I Basic Package includes the following:

- {{L1 nl}} Model I system

- Power stand

- R1 remote control

- Carrying bag for the power stand

- Two carrying bags for the {{L1 nl}} Model I system

- Power cord

- Remote control cable (15 ft)

- Protective plug

- Owners<nowiki>’</nowiki> guide, quick setup guide, warranty card and spare fuse

The Single Bass Package includes the following:

- {{L1 nl}} Model I system

- Power stand

- B1 bass module

- R1 remote control

- Carrying bag for the power stand

- Carrying bag for the B1 bass module

- Two carrying bags for the {{L1 nl}} Model I system

- Power cord

- Bass module cable

- Remote control cable (15 ft)

- Protective plug

- Owners<nowiki>’</nowiki> guide, quick setup guide, warranty card and spare fuse

The Double Bass Package includes the following:

- {{L1 nl}} Model I system

- Power stand

- Two B1 bass modules

- R1 remote control

- Carrying bag for the power stand

- Two carrying bags for the B1 bass modules

- Two carrying bags for the {{L1 nl}} Model I system

- Power cord

- Two bass module cables

- Remote control cable (15 ft)

- Protective plug

- Owners<nowiki>’</nowiki> guide, quick setup guide, warranty card and spare fuse

The PackLite® Extended Bass Package includes the following:

- PackLite® power amplifier

- ¼-in TRS cable (18 in)

- Nylon carry pouch for the amplifier

- Power cord

- Two B1 bass modules

- Two B1 bass module 4-wire cables (5 ft)

- Two B1 bass module soft covers

'''PackLite® power amplifier Model A1'''

Designed for instruments that require additional headroom and increased output in the deep bass range, such as electric bass, bass drum and high-output playback of recorded dance music. The PackLite® power amplifier can power up to two additional B1 bass modules.

- PackLite power amplifier

- ¼-in TRS cable (18 in)

- Nylon carry pouch for the amplifier

- Power cord

- Owners<nowiki>’</nowiki> guide, quick setup guide and spare fuse

=== What are the available accessories? ===

For a detailed list of the accessories below, please refer to Appendix A.

== Accessories ==

=== B1 bass module===

This compact, powerful bass enclosure is designed to be used with {{L1 nl}} systems helping to deliver the depth and impact of such instruments as bass guitar, drums and low voices. Low-pitched wind or stringed instruments, guitars and keyboards also can benefit from the additional low-end output that the B1 provides. Includes professional padded gig bag, and one cable to connect the B1 bass module to the power stand and slip cover.

=== B1 cable 5.5ft (1.7m)===

Heavy-duty 4-pin cable connects B1 bass modules to {{L1 nl}} Model II or II power stands. Longer B1 cables may be obtained from www.audiopile.net.

=== Standard B1 carrying cover===

A standard carrying cover for the B1 bass module. Cover is a direct replacement for the cover included with a new {{L1 nl}} Model II system package.

=== Heavy-duty B1 gig bag===

Custom designed to hold your B1 bass module. Incorporates our high-end construction features to protect from scuffs and scrapes on all six sides.

=== PackLite® power amplifier Model A1===

Designed for instruments that require additional headroom and increased output in the deep bass range, such as electric bass, bass drum and high-output playback of recorded dance music. The PackLite® power amplifier can power up to two additional B1 bass modules.

=== Carry pouch for Model A1 amplifier===

Standard nylon protective pouch for the A1 PackLite power amplifier.

=== ¼-in TRS Cable for A1 amplifier 18-in (0.5m)===

Standard, balanced tip-ring-sleeve ¼-inch cable connects the A1 PackLite power amplifier to a power stand.

=== Heavy-duty gig bag set===

Durable and form-fitted, the heavy-duty gig bag set will help protect the {{L1 nl}} loudspeaker and power stand components during transport. Telescoping travel handle and roller wheels makes for a very easy transport of the power stand. The {{L1 nl}} bag, lined with extra padding, comes with a shoulder strap. A rugged duffle bag contains convenient pockets and can hold the R1 remote control with plenty of room for cables and accessories.

=== Standard carrying bag set===

Standard carrying bags for the power stand and {{L1 nl}} loudspeaker. Set of three bags is a direct replacement for the set included with a new {{L1 nl}} Model I or II system package.

=== R1 remote control===

Rugged and easy-to-operate remote control allows performers to control their {{L1 nl}} Model I systems sound from almost anywhere on stage. Features 3-band EQ/volume control for both of the mic/line inputs and a master level control to adjust overall system volume. Includes one loop-and-hook fastener strip for quick mounting to a microphone stand or flat surfaces like keyboards and music stands. (Does not include remote cable. Long or standard remote cables may be purchased separately.)

=== Standard R1 remote control cable 16ft (5m)===

This proprietary 7-pin cable comes standard with the power stand.

=== Fuse kit (120 volt only)===

Four spare 15-amp fuses for the 120V power stand.

=== {{L1 nl}} Model I or II power stand cord (120 volt only)===

Designed to connect a 120 volt power stand to an AC outlet.

=== Protective plug===

Molded rubber plug snaps into the power stand to protect the loudspeaker mount and connector during travel.

== Support ==

=== What is the limited warranty? ===

The limited warranty on all electronic components in the U.S. is one year (the power stand and PackLite® amplifier) and five years on loudspeakers (the {{L1 nl}} Model I system and B1 bass module). For limited warranty information in other parts of the world, please visit [https://www.bhtu.com/Local Settings/Application Data/Microsoft/Word/www.bose.com/musicians www.Bose.com/musicians] for more information.

=== Can I use this 120-volt system in another country? ===

No. The unit does not have a universal power supply. Use the 120V version only in 120V countries. Use the 240V version in countries with 220, 230 or 240V systems at 50 Hz. We do not have a 100V system.

=== I need a longer NL4 cable for my B1 bass module. What are my options? ===

It is generally good practice to locate the B1 bass modules near the Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker. If you require more length, ensure that it is a 4-conductor NL4 speaker cable. One vendor that we have used is [http://www.audiopile.net/ www.audiopile.net].

=== Are there any user-replaceable parts? ===

Yes. User-replaceable parts are available. We offer easily replaceable parts such as power stand I/O Panel covers, R1 remote control knobs, cables, and {{L1 nl}}/B1 loudspeaker grilles and end caps. We feel that this service is extremely important to reduce working musicians<nowiki>’</nowiki> downtime.

=== Are the products repairable? To what extent? ===

Yes. The products are repairable. The power stand is currently repairable at the board level. Drivers, end caps and grills can be replaced on the {{L1 nl}} and B1 units.

=== What are the replacement costs? ===

In the U.S. call 877-335-2673 or e-mail [mailto:support@Bose.com support@Bose.com] for further details.

== Appendix A: ==

For the {{L1 nl}} family of products

{|border="2" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4" width="100%"
|align = "center"|'''Accessories'''
|align = "center"|'''Product Code'''

|-
|=== '''B1 bass module ''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|B1 bass module
|align = "center"|032494

|-
|B1 cable 5.5ft (1.7m)
|align = "center"|035404

|-
|Standard B1 carrying cover
|align = "center"|035025

|-
|Heavy-duty B1 gig bag
|align = "center"|041785

|-
|align = "center"|'''Accessories'''
|align = "center"|'''Product Code'''

|-
|=== '''A1 amplifier''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|PackLite® power amplifier Model A1
|align = "center"|039057

|-
|Model A1 amplifier carry pouch
|align = "center"|039860

|-
|Model A1 ¼" TRS cable 18-in (0.5m)
|align = "center"|039861

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
|=== '''Model I ''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|Power stand power cord
|align = "center"|035393

|-
|R1 remote control
|align = "center"|035394

|-
|R1 7-pin cable (5m)
|align = "center"|035403

|-
|R1 7-pin cable (10m)
|align = "center"|035411

|-
|L1 carry bags
|align = "center"|034273

|-
|Power stand fuse kit (120V)
|align = "center"|035408

|-
|Power stand protective plug
|align = "center"|035410

|-
|Heavy-duty power stand/{{L1 nl}}/duffle carrying bag set
|align = "center"|041784

|-
|Standard {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand/{{L1 nl}} carrying bag set
|align = "center"|034273

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
|=== '''Model II''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|{{L1 nl}} Model II Cylindrical Radiator® carry bag
|align = "center"|044023

|-
|{{L1 nl}} Model II power stand carry bag
|align = "center"|044024

|-
|Heavy duty power stand/{{L1 nl}}/duffle carrying bag set
|align = "center"|041784

|-
|Standard {{L1 nl}} Model I power stand/{{L1 nl}} carrying bag set
|align = "center"|034273

|-
| 
| 

|-
|=== '''{{T1 nl}} ''' ===
| 

|-
|{{T1 nl}} power supply
|align = "center"|042533

|-
|{{T1 nl}} audio engine microphone stand bracket
|align = "center"|042535

|}

</noinclude>
[[category:Model I]]
[[Category:FAQ]]

L1® Model II / FAQ

8461-09-27T03:09:00Z

ST: added {{:L1® Model II Documentation}}

__NOEDITSECTION__
<noinclude>
<table><tr>
<td valign="top" width="30%">
This is the latest version of the L1® FAQs originally published in February 2008 on the [http://www.bose.com/controller?event=VIEW_STATIC_PAGE_EVENT&url=/musicians/faqs.jsp Main Bose Site]. It appears here with permission from {{Bose}}. As a reprint of a {{Bose}} document, it is not open for edits, but please use the discussion page to make note of any issues or discrepancies.
</td>
<td valign="top" width="30%">'''Documentation'''
{{:L1® Model II Documentation}}</td>
<td valign="top">{{BoseFAQ}}</td>
</tr></table>

</noinclude>

=== Why does an {{L1}} Model II power stand contain only a single analog input? ===
The {{L1}} Model II system provides a single analog input suitable for many applications and compatible with standard mixers, DJ mixers, laptops and other devices. This enables the layout of the power stand to be less cluttered, with no unnecessary connectors. The end result is a clean, compact and efficient design.<br></p> <p> For musicians who need more inputs, our multichannel T1 ToneMatch® audio engine is designed to work with an {{L1}} Model II system via a simple digital connection. It offers three mic/line inputs, two line inputs (L/R), our largest library of ToneMatch presets, proprietary zEQ and a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing.

=== What's the proper method for setting the gain on a Model II power stand when connected to an analog source? ===
While playing your instrument or audio source as loudly as you would in performance, adjust the trim level on the power stand until you see the LED go from yellow to red. Then back the trim level off until the signal LED is predominantly yellow with brief peaks into red.

===What's the proper method for setting the gain on a Model II power stand when connected to a T1 ToneMatch audio engine? ===
Set the output volume of your source to normal operating volume. Make sure the master volume and channel volume on the ToneMatch audio engine are set to 0. While playing your instrument or audio source as loudly as you would in performance, turn the appropriate channel's trim control clockwise until the signal/clip indicator glows green or yellow. If the indicator flashes red or glows steady red, turn the trim control counterclockwise to decrease the level.


<noinclude>
= Previous version of the Model II FAQ =
<table><tr>
<td valign="top" width="50%">
This information was originally prepared by {{Bose}} and may later be published on their
website: http://www.bose.com/musicians/. It appears here with permission from {{Bose}}. As a reprint of a {{Bose}} document, it is not open for edits, but please use the discussion page to make note of any issues or discrepancies.
</td>
<td valign="top">{{BoseFAQ}}</td>
</tr></table>

<br>
'''Focus Categories'''

[[{{PAGENAME}}#The_Technology|The Technology]] | [[{{PAGENAME}}#General_(Product)|General Product]] | [[{{PAGENAME}}#Functionality|Functionality]] | [[{{PAGENAME}}#Applications|Applications]]
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#The L1™ Model II product family|The L1™ Model II product family]]
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Support|Support]]
== The Technology ==

=== What is the L1™ Model II system? ===

The L1™ Model II system represents a new approach to amplification. This approach was designed to address the root cause of complaints by musicians and audience members regarding the quality of live amplified musical performances.

=== How does this approach work? ===

In the new approach mixer, PA speakers, monitors and backline amplifiers (e.g. guitar amps) are replaced by special Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeakers, which are located behind the musicians. These speakers have the unique ability to radiate sound evenly across the stage and into the audience with very little change in sound level.

The approach is naturalistic in that it mimics an acoustic instrument performance: Each player has control over his or her individual sound, and the sound comes from the multiple directions that correspond to the musician<nowiki>’</nowiki>s positions on stage – a property of acoustic music known to enhance our ability to hear and appreciate individual instruments and voices in ensemble passages. The new approach has many integrated features that allow the user to set up the system in just minutes.

=== Is this technology better-suited for seasoned musicians who already have tons of gear, or for musicians that are just getting started and need a simple solution? ===

The system is equally valuable for the seasoned musician and the beginner. Experienced performers immediately will recognize that they can hear better and therefore play better, and they instantly appreciate the easy setup. Musicians who are starting will enjoy playing more because they<nowiki>’</nowiki>ll spend more time playing and less time hassling with equipment. They will develop as better players because they can hear themselves and each other. All will benefit from the knowledge that the sound they produce on stage is what is radiated to the audience. Never again will they hear and think one thing only to find out the audience heard something completely different when they asked "How did we sound?" after the performance.

=== What are some of the details of the electronics in the L1™ Model II power stand? ===

Powerful amplification is enclosed in the Model II power stand – enough to drive the L1™ Model II system and up to two B1 bass modules to output levels required by bands in venues up to about 500 people.

=== Why does the Model II power stand contain only a single analog input? ===

Based on customer feedback, Bose provides a single analog input, which is suitable for many applications and is compatible with outputs from standard mixing consoles, DJ mixers, laptop computers and many other devices. This enables the layout of the power stand to be less cluttered with connectors that ultimately may not be used for many applications. The end result is a clean and compact design.

Musicians who require more inputs can purchase the T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine, which is specifically designed to work with the L1™ Model II system. The T1 is a powerful multichannel audio device designed for musicians to use with the Model II system. It includes our largest library of ToneMatch™ presets, proprietary zEQ, a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing, and five channel inputs.

=== Are there similarities between the L1™ Model II system and line arrays currently in use? ===

Line arrays have been used for large concert performances as the PA component of a traditional triple amplification system. Unlike these large-venue systems, the L1™ Model II system is designed as a portable implementation of a line or pole-shaped source. It is designed to be positioned behind each musician, providing accurate coverage for musicians and audiences.

=== In nightclubs, you normally see very large loudspeakers for bass. How do your smaller bass enclosures compare? What makes them so special? ===

Bose has a number of propriety technologies for bass and has a long history of developing systems that produce high output in the bass range from smaller enclosures. The B1 bass module is no exception. The fact that it is used in an integrated system (with amplification and signal processing) means that performance can be enhanced in ways that a conventional component-based solution can<nowiki>’</nowiki>t. Large signal performance, for example, can be greatly improved with the use of a dedicated digital signal processor, which is built into the T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine.

At the same time, the B1 bass module has been made modular, so that higher bass output can be created for instruments and styles that require it. An upright bass in a jazz trio might use only one bass module. On the other extreme, the electric bass in a 10-piece funk band might use four.

== Functionality ==

=== Is this really a "plug and play" solution? How long does it take to set up? ===

The L1™ Model II system is designed to disassemble into easy-to-carry pieces. Everything can be carried by hand without the need for special equipment. Moreover, the products are designed to assemble in just minutes, and because the approach requires no mixing, the complex task of wiring each instrument to the mixer and then from the mixer to the amplifiers and speakers is eliminated. The musicians simply plug in, and they<nowiki>’</nowiki>re ready to play.

=== Are sound operators required in the new approach? ===

No. Just as acoustic-instrument ensembles (such as a string quartet) are able to balance their own sound, so too can a group playing amplified music using the new approach. The reason is that when musicians are in total control, and know that the sound they are creating on stage is what is radiated outward to the audience, they are best-suited to creating the required balance of voices and instruments.

=== What happens if a musician is blocking the view of the L1™ Model II system? Doesn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t that block the sound? ===

Sound diffracts (bends) around objects. So long as the musician is not standing literally against the L1™ Model II system, the sound diffracts around the musician or other objects such as a keyboard or other musical instrument.

Connectivity:

=== What is the proper method for setting the gain on the L1™ Model II power stand when connected to an analog source? ===

Play source material at the loudest volume that will be present in the performance and adjust the trim level until you achieve the desired volume. Refer to the signal clip LED on the power stand while adjusting the trim level until you see the LED go from yellow to red in color. Back the trim level off until the signal LED is predominantly yellow with brief peaks into the red.

=== What is the proper method for setting the gain on the L1™ Model II power stand when connected to a T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine? ===

Adjust output volume of source to normal operating volume. Make sure that the Master volume and the channel volume on the T1 is set to 0. While playing your instrument/audio sources as loudly as you would during a performance, turn the Trim control on applicable channel of the T1 clockwise until the signal/clip indicator glows green or yellow. If the indicator flashes red or glows steady red, turn the trim control counter-clockwise to decrease the level.

=== Can I use the bass-line-out on the L1™ Model II power stand to connect to a bass amplifier and cabinet? ===

The bass-line-out connector provides a flat 40-Hz to 180-Hz bandpass signal when no B1 bass modules are used with the power stand. We recommend unplugging the B1 bass modules to ensure correct EQ compensation of the Bass Line OUT jack, and phase consistency.

=== Do the mic inputs of the T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine have phantom power? ===

Phantom power <nowiki>+</nowiki>48v can be applied to Channels 1-3.

=== How many B1 bass modules can you connect? ===

One power stand can power up to two B1 bass modules.

=== Can this product be used in other countries? ===

There are two voltage versions of the power stand and the A1 PackLite® amplifier. 120V versions are available in the U.S., Canada and some Latin American countries. The 230V versions are available in Europe and Australia.

Please visit http://www.Bose.com/musicians for up-to-date information about product availability.

=== How do I know which half of the Cylindrical Radiator® to insert into the power stand first? ===

The upper and lower halves of the L1™ Model II system are not identical. The bottom half is easily identifiable because it has a large end cap, which gets inserted first into the power stand. The upper half contains the Bose® logo and uses a tongue-and-groove mechanism to ensure a solid mechanical and electrical connection to the lower half. Both halves are clearly labeled on the back, indicating proper insertion.

=== Can you use 2-wire Speakon® cables for the B1 bass modules? ===

No. Only 4-wire Speakon® cables should be used with the power stand. The additional two wires (<nowiki>+</nowiki>2 and -2) in the connector are used for sensing purposes. Upon connection, the power stand is able to sense and adjust (EQ and level) for 0, 1 or 2 B1 bass modules connected to the bass-module-out Speakon® connector.

=== How can I tell if I<nowiki>’</nowiki>m using the correct Speakon® cable? ===

If you plug in a 4-wire Speakon® cable to the bass-module-out connector with music playing through, you will clearly hear the L1™ Model II system mute for a moment. If you are using an incorrect cable, such as a 2-wire Speakon® cable, the momentary muting will not occur.

=== Can the system be used with just one half of a L1™ Model II system in instances where the ceiling may not be tall enough for assembly of the full loudspeaker? ===

Using only one half of the L1™ Model II system will significantly impact the performance. The EQ would be incorrect and your ears still need to be at the same height as some part of the loudspeaker, which is difficult at 3.5 feet tall. While there should not be any damage to the system by using it like this, it is not recommended.

=== Can I use the system outside? ===
<section begin=temperature />
Yes. You may use your system for outdoor gigs, provided that it is protected from extreme elements. The system has been tested to operate in 0°C to 50°C temperatures and be stored in -30°C to 70°C temperatures. In cases of light rain outside, take precautions to cover the back panel of the power stand. Water must not get into the air inlet slits inside the back panel, on the loudspeaker drivers or inside the L1™ cavity on the power stand.
<section end=temperature />
Unofficial FAQ Extension:
{{#lst:Temperature|conversions}}

=== Why doesn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t Bose Corporation publish full system specifications? ===

Most of the specifications that are used to describe sound systems can be very misleading.

They pretend that relatively complex physical or perceptual properties can be condensed to a single number (or a small set of numbers) that determines somehow the quality of a product. These numbers then are used to compare or rank different products. In many cases, these numbers only loosely relate to what a user would experience in a real-world application. Furthermore, there are quite a number of variations in the details of how a specific measurement can be carried out. We believe it serves our customers better to describe the product in terms that they can more directly relate to, and to enable and encourage our customers to experience the product directly either through a demonstration or through actual real-world trials they conduct themselves.

Bose Corporation publishes technical data whenever we think it is helpful. For example, for our products that are used primarily in installed sound systems, detailed technical specifications are available. This data is normally used by professional sound system engineers, who are well-trained to interpret the data correctly and put it into the right context. While some specifications add value in comparing two products that are otherwise very similar, they are mostly meaningless for a product that is fundamentally different or new, such as the L1™ Model II system.

=== How prone is the system to feedback? ===

The L1™ Model II system is resistant to, but not immune from, feedback. Its performance in this critical dimension has been shown, in the vast majority of cases, to be significantly better than the traditional triple system amplification approach of backline instrument amplifiers, monitor system and PA system.

=== Can I connect a passive sub woofer to the Bass Module Output? ===

No. We do not recommend that you connect anything except the B1 bass module to this output, as the internal amplifier and B1 bass modules are designed to properly equalize the system when connected. Use the '''Bass Line Out''' connection to feed a powered subwoofer or additional amplifier.

== Applications ==

=== Where can the L1™ Model II system be used? ===

The L1™ Model II system is suitable for amplified music performances in venues with occupancies up to 500 people. Typically, this translates to maximum listener distances of about 150 feet (45 meters). Thus the system will fill auditoriums, places of worship, gymnasiums, ballrooms, dance clubs, coffeehouses and more – places where the vast majority of live music performances take place. In larger venues, a musical group can use the new approach on stage and enjoy all the benefits that allow musicians to hear themselves and each other better. Signals from the stage can be fed to speakers that supply sound to distant seating areas.

=== What kinds of musical groups can use the new technology? ===

There are no restrictions in this regard. Any instrument, any group size and any genre will benefit from the advantages of hearing themselves better, of being in complete control of their music, of having their audiences hear them better, and of being able to set up and play in a small fraction of the time it takes to set up a conventional system.

=== You talk about excessive loudness. Are you saying the new system isn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t capable of playing loud? How loud can it play? ===

The new approach can compete with the maximum levels created by most conventional systems. What<nowiki>’</nowiki>s changed is that a band will rarely, if ever, play at the kind of sustained or persistently high sound levels, because the struggle to hear oneself and one<nowiki>’</nowiki>s fellow musicians – the reason to increase the volume in the first place – is gone. With the new approach, therefore, the dynamics are vastly improved, one of the major contributors to musical quality. In testing at Bose, musical groups plagued by the problem of excessive loudness were delighted to find that within a very short time (one or two sessions), their average level had dropped drastically while their peak level remained the same. They expressed an enormous increase in the enjoyment of playing, and audiences expressed their appreciation of music that was exciting but not overwhelmingly loud.

=== Does every musician in the band need his or her own L1™ Model II system? ===

No. In the fullest embodiment of this new approach, each musician in a group has a L1™ Model II system. In some situations – a larger ensemble on a small stage, for example – testing showed that two or more musicians could share one L1™ Model II system without a significant erosion of the benefits of the concept when the musicians were standing or sitting directly next to each other. Two horn players standing side by side or three support vocalists standing next to each other can use one L1 Model II system, as an example.

=== Can one musician use an L1™ system while the rest of the band plays through a conventional system? ===

Yes. There are two ways that the musician can use the L1™ Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker onstage with a band using the conventional triple system setup.

A performer can use the system onstage without connecting to any other house reinforcement equipment, including the main front speakers (sometimes known as "house mains") and stage monitors. However, only some of the benefits of the new approach are enjoyed in this case. The musician using the L1™ Model II system will hear him or herself better, will be heard better by the other musicians and will be heard better by the audience. However, the full potential of this new system is not realized because only the performer and not the complete band is equipped and engaged to perform with the benefits of this new amplification approach.

Performers can also use L1™ Model II systems to enhance their sound onstage, and use the available Line Output jacks on the primary channels to send the audio signal(s) to a house PA. In this case, the musician and the band enjoy the benefits from the musicians<nowiki>’</nowiki> sound onstage and only onstage. There are no advantages for the audience. Loss of the benefits of the "cocktail party" effect, lack of eye-ear coordination, the potential for excessive reverberation, and the problems of bulky and complex equipment all exist if the remainder of the band plays through a triple system.

=== Can DJs use this system? ===

Yes. The system has important advantages over conventional systems. One problem with portable

PA systems is the use of stand-mounted speakers, which are very loud close to the speaker and not loud enough away from the speaker. The L1™ Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker is unusual in that you can adjust for the desired level on the dance floor and in the audience, and then walk literally right next to the speaker without it getting excessively loud. This translates into much greater comfort for the guests.

The system also has a sleek, elegant profile that fits nicely into event décors and minimizes sight-line issues.

=== Can L1™ systems be used as a traditional PA system? ===

Yes. L1™ Model II systems can be used to replace PA speakers. Their unique radiation properties help them deliver more even sound coverage and a larger stereo field – a benefit that has been confirmed in listening tests. The benefits of compactness for transportation and rapid assembly also will be enjoyed.

=== Can musicians really mix themselves? ===

Yes, when they are in complete control of their sound. Musicians know how to play together acoustically and have done so countless times, regardless of whether they also play with amplification. All musicians know how to alter their playing in order to create a balance when playing with others. In extensive testing at Bose, it was found that this skill is quickly revived when using the L1™ system.

=== Does the new approach work for electric guitar? Aren<nowiki>’</nowiki>t guitarists particular about their guitar amplifiers? ===

Yes. For most electric guitarists, the guitar amplifier is considered a part of their instrument, as inseparable from the sound of their instrument as is the wood and body shape of an acoustic guitar. For example, the distortion

created by the electronic tubes in some guitar amplifiers produces tones essential to many guitarists<nowiki>’</nowiki> sound. Even the speaker transducers and speaker cabinets used in guitar amplifiers produce unique tone essential to some players<nowiki>’</nowiki> sound.

=== How can these elements of the electric guitar<nowiki>’</nowiki>s tone be included in the L1™ system approach? ===

There are at least three ways this can be done, and each has been extensively tested by guitarists participating in the Bose® research that led to the new approach. The advantage gained in these approaches constitutes what is arguably the most important gain in electrical guitar sound since the invention of the guitar amplifier itself. The reason is that the Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker overcomes the problem of uneven radiation of sound to the stage and audience from traditional guitar amplifiers. This is of particular interest for the electric guitar because the radiation pattern of typical guitar amplifiers is so harshly directional as to be painful to listeners on-axis, and dull and muddy off-axis. Before, guitarists could create the desired "sweet spot" sound in one location (theirs), while all others were blasted on-axis or couldn<nowiki>’</nowiki>t hear the detail well off-axis.

1) A number of companies have in the past 10 years produced electronic devices that model the tone produced by tubes, guitar transducers and guitar amplifier speaker cabinets. These modeling amps initially helped to solve the problem of recording electric guitar and have become increasingly popular on stage. The electric guitarist simply plugs into one of these devices and the output of the device is then plugged into the L1™ Model II system. This is the most convenient and elegant way to use electric guitar with the L1 system.

2) One of a number of tube-based or solid-state guitar preamplifiers can be used. The output of these preamplifiers is plugged directly into the power stand.

3) The third way is for purists who are not satisfied that the modeling amps (first solution above) capture all of the nuances of a traditional guitar amplifier. These guitarists can use a tube amplifier with a microphone in front of the amplifier. Exceptional results have been obtained with the use of one of a growing number of low-wattage tube amplifiers. This class of guitar amplifier is becoming popular with players who want the tone of a tube amplifier but do not want to produce extremely high sound levels in order to get that tone.

=== How does the output of an L1™ Model II system compare to a loud stack of guitar amplifiers and cabinets? ===

The full stack is considered a standard by many guitarists, both in terms of tone and output.

An L1™ Model II system can compete effectively with the output of a full stack. However, there are other benefits, such as the radiation pattern of the L1 Model II system, that distinguish it from the full stack<nowiki>’</nowiki>s acute directional beam. Moreover, the Model II system can be used to amplify other instruments at the same time. The full stack is for one thing only: electric guitar.

=== Can you create distortion for guitars using the L1™ system? ===

No. Distortion must be produced first and then fed into the power stand as a clean, non-clipping signal. To achieve distortion, the guitarist can use a few methods:

- Inline devices: One popular method would be to use any of the effects pedals on the market or use a DSP-based amplifier modeler, such as the Line 6 "Pod," which models the tone produced by amplifier tubes, guitar transducers and guitar amplifier speaker cabinets.

- Miking a guitar amplifier: Another method would be to use a guitar amplifier and mic the speaker as closely as possible. The trick here is to run the amplifier at the lowest possible level at which the correct tone is attainable but does not diminish the benefits of the L1™ Model II system. Louder amplifiers can be located and miked offstage. Miking small, low-watt amplifiers is a better technique for this method.

- Use a loading device. Some electric guitarists may prefer to use their amplifier<nowiki>’</nowiki>s output as an input signal into the power stand. Before doing this, they must use a load device such as a "Plate Soak" or a "Hot Plate" to give a line-level output suitable for the input stage of the power stand.

- Use the "line output" of a guitar amplifier. Some amplifiers have this option and may be suitable for some guitarists. The only suggestion here is to turn the volume of the amplifier down so only the L1™ Model II system is heard.

Refer to the Bose® website and Musicians Community Forum at [http://www.bose.com/musicians http://www.Bose.com/musicians] to learn how to interface additional instruments with the system.

=== Can acoustic instruments be amplified with the L1™ Model II system? ===

Yes. When a T1 is not connected, an acoustic instrument equipped with a pickup system may connect directly into the Model II power stand. In cases where pickups are not present, a microphone may be used. When a T1 is not being used, you may connect directly into the Model II system<nowiki>’</nowiki>s analog input. However, in this instance, a microphone cable must be used in conjunction with a direct box or a transformer to adapt to the power stands ¼ "analog input connector.

=== How many B1 bass modules can I stack up on stage or when transporting? ===

Up to four B1 bass modules may be stacked in a column using the integrated alignment tabs on the sides of the enclosures.

== General (Product) ==

=== I already own a L1™ Model I or Model II system. Can I purchase the T1 separately and use it with the system? ===

Yes. The T1 is available for purchase separately and may be used with either an L1™ Model I or Model II system. When used with a Model II system, the audio is connected digitally via the ToneMatch™ ports. When used with a Model I, a separate power supply is required to power the T1 and the audio is analog. When using with a Model I, simply connect the T1<nowiki>’</nowiki>s Master Output jack to the analog input of Channel 3 or 4 on the Model I power stand. The T1 power supply is available through Bose or authorized dealers of the L1 family of products.

=== What is the 45-day Better Music Guarantee? ===

At Bose, we recognize that customers may want to experience the L1™ in their own environment with their specific gear. That is why we allow you to purchase and use the system in your specific application for up to 45 days, and if for any reason you are not satisfied you may return it for a refund. This offer is exclusive to Bose® direct sales channels.

=== What are the weights and dimensions of the L1™ Model II system? ===
==== Weight ====
* L1™ Model II power stand: 23.7 lb (10.7 kg)
* L1™ Model II Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker
** Top Section: 16.3 lb (7.4 kg)
** Bottom Section: 17.4 lb (7.9 kg)
* B1 bass module: 25.1 lb (11.4 kg)

==== Dimensions ====
* L1™ Model II power stand: 5<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H x 10<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 27<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D (12.8 cm x 26.2 cm x 69.2 cm)
* L1™ Model II Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker
** Top Section: 43 ¼ <nowiki>’’</nowiki>H x 3½<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 4<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D (109.86 cm x 8.89 cm x 10.16 cm)
** Bottom Section: 43 3/4<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H x 3½<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 4<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D (111.13 cm x 8.89 cm x 10.16 cm)
* B1 bass module: 15<nowiki>’’</nowiki>H x 10¼<nowiki>’’</nowiki>W x 17¾<nowiki>’’</nowiki>D (38.0 cm x 26.0 cm x 45.0 cm)

=== What is the fully assembled height of the L1™ Model II system? ===
84 <nowiki>’’</nowiki> (213.4 cm)

Note: The bayonet portion of the upper section of the {{L1 CR}} is included in the individual measurements but not in the overall system height. Similarly, the lower section of the {{L1 CR}} fits into the power stand and that portion is not included in the overall system height.

=== Does the system ship with carrying cases? ===

Yes. The Model II power stand and Model II Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker both ship with padded carrying bags. The B1 bass module ships with a carrying case.

=== Are hard-shell cases available for the products? ===

No. Although Bose does not offer hard shell cases directly, visit [http://www.bose.com/musicians www.Bose.com/musicians] to view user comments on this topic. (and [[Hardshell Cases]] in this wiki).

=== What is the limited warranty? ===

{{#lst:Warranty Information|L1™ Model II}}

== The L1™ Model II product family ==

=== When was the L1™ Model II system first available for consumers to purchase? ===

On March 28, 2007, Bose Corporation introduced the L1™ Model II system. It will be available for sale May 1, 2007, through our internal sales groups and participating authorized dealers.

=== Do the new products compete with Bose<nowiki>’</nowiki>s other portable professional systems? ===

Yes. There are some situations where in the past we would have recommended a Bose® solution comprised of our other portable products, where today we would recommend the L1™ Model II system instead. Live music performance is the most obvious application where we would do so. There remain a number of applications where our other portable products are an excellent choice.

=== Where can you hear and try the L1™ Model II system? ===

Order it and try it for 45 days directly from Bose Corporation. We encourage customers to experience the L1™ in their own environment with their specific gear. That is why we offer the ability for you to purchase and use the

system in your specific application for up to 45 days, and if for any reason you are not satisfied you may return it for a refund. This offer is exclusive to Bose® direct sales channels.

Additionally, you can easily try out the product at Guitar Center® stores nationwide. Other methods of demonstration are available in North America. For more details, visit [http://www.bose.com/musicians www.Bose.com/musicians].

=== How does the cost of the L1™ Model II compare to traditional PA equipment? ===

Because of the enormous reduction in complexity, the new system compares favorably with the cost of a high-quality conventional amplification system for a four piece band. However the enormous reduction in transportation and set up costs mean that the new system is much less expensive to own and operate. Superiority is achieved when this cost advantage is combined with what we feel is a quantum improvement in sound quality.

=== What products are available in the L1™ Model II family? What is included in the box? ===

==== The L1™ Model II system ====
includes the following:

* Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker

* L1™ Model II power stand

* B1 bass module

* Padded carrying bags for L1, power stand and B1

* 4 conductor bass module cable

* AC power cord

* Demonstration DVD

* L1™ Model II Owners Guide, B1 bass module Owner<nowiki>’</nowiki>s Guide, Quick setup guide and product registration card

==== The L1™ Model II system with T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine ====
includes the following:

* L1™ Model II system

* Cylindrical Radiator® loudspeaker

* L1™ Model II power stand

* B1 bass module

* Padded carrying bags for L1, power stand and B1

* 4 conductor bass module cable

* AC power cord

* Demonstration DVD

* L1™ Model II Owner<nowiki>’</nowiki>s Guide, B1 bass module Owner<nowiki>’</nowiki>s Guide, Quick setup guide and product registration card

'''T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine'''

* T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine (with protective top)

* Soft carry bag

* ToneMatch cable

* Carriage

* Mounting bar

* DVD-ROM

==== The T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine ====
includes the following:

* T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine (with protective top)

* Soft carry bag

* ToneMatch cable

* Carriage

* Mounting bar

* DVD-ROM

==== PackLite® power amplifier Model A1====

Designed for instruments that require additional headroom and increased output in the deep bass range, such as electric bass, bass drum and high-output playback of recorded dance music. The PackLite® power amplifier can power up to two additional B1 bass modules.

'''PackLite® Extended Bass Package'''

The PackLite® Extended Bass Package includes:

* PackLite power amplifier

* 1/4-in TRS cable (18 in)

* Nylon carry pouch for the amplifier

* Power cord

* Two B1 bass modules

* Two B1 bass module 4-wire cables (5 ft)

* Two B1 bass module soft covers

== Accessories ==

=== What are the available accessories for the L1™ family of products? ===

=== B1 bass module ===

This compact, powerful bass enclosure is designed to be used with L1™ systems helping to deliver the depth and impact of such instruments as bass guitar, drums and low voices. Low-pitched wind or stringed instruments, guitars and keyboards also can benefit from the additional low-end output that the B1 provides. Includes professional padded gig bag, and one cable to connect the B1 bass module to the power stand and slip cover.

===Standard B1 carrying cover===

A standard carrying cover for the B1 bass module. Cover is a direct replacement for the cover included with a new L1™ Model II system package.

===B1 cable 5.5ft (1.7m)===

Heavy-duty 4-pin cable connects B1 bass modules to L1™ Model II or II power stands. Longer B1 cables may be obtained from [https://www.bhtu.com/Local Settings/Application Data/Microsoft/Word/www.audiopile.net www.audiopile.net].

===Heavy-duty B1 gig bag===

Custom designed to hold your B1 bass module. Incorporates our high-end construction features to protect from scuffs and scrapes on all six sides.

===PackLite® power amplifier Model A1===

Designed for instruments that require additional headroom and increased output in the deep bass range, such as electric bass, bass drum and high-output playback of recorded dance music. The PackLite® power amplifier can power up to two additional B1 bass modules.

===Carry pouch for Model A1 amplifier===

Standard nylon protective pouch for the A1 PackLite power amplifier.

===¼" TRS Cable for A1 amplifier 18-in (0.5m)===

Standard, balanced tip-ring-sleeve ¼" cable connects the A1 PackLite® power amplifier to a power stand.

===Heavy-duty power stand/L1™/duffle carrying bag set===

Durable and form-fitted, the heavy-duty gig bag set will help protect the L1™ loudspeaker and power stand components during transport. Telescoping travel handle and roller wheels makes for a very easy transport of the power stand. The L1™ bag, lined with extra padding, comes with a shoulder strap. A rugged duffle bag contains convenient pockets and can hold the R1 remote control with plenty of room for cables and accessories.

===Standard power stand/L1™ carrying bag set===

Standard carrying bags for the power stand and L1™ loudspeaker. Set of three bags is a direct replacement for the set included with a new L1™ Model II or II system package.

===L1™ Model II power stand cord (120 volt only)===

Designed to connect a 120 volt power stand to an AC outlet.

For product codes and part numbers, please see Appendix A.

== Support ==

=== Where can I collaborate with Bose® staff and existing owners to learn more on how the L1™ Model II system can work for my specific application? ===

We host a public forum that allows our helpful user community to share their experiences and collaborate in real time on topics that are important to them. You will find extensive application specific documentation and helpful hints. The forum is fully searchable and can be accessed at [http://bose.infopop.cc/6/ubb.x http://Bose.infopop.cc/6/ubb.x].

You also may contact our product support team and speak with our knowledgeable staff of musicians. They may be reached at 877-335-2673.

=== What is the limited warranty? ===

The limited warranty on electronic components in the U.S. is one year (the power stand and PackLite® amplifier) and five years on loudspeakers (both the L1™ Model II system and B1 bass module). For limited warranty information in other parts of the world, please visit [https://www.bhtu.com/Local Settings/Application Data/Microsoft/Word/www.bose.com/musicians www.Bose.com/musicians] for more information.

=== There is a buzz in the system. Any suggestions on how to fix it? ===

Noise and buzzing is a typical problem with pro audio gear. The new Bose® approach is very much immune to noise because it is a simple, independent system. The typical buzzes and hums associated with ground loops are gone when you use an independent system that is not interconnected electronically to other pieces of equipment. This is not a comprehensive guide to noise troubleshooting, but will offer a suggestion. One of the most important suggestions to alleviate buzz and hum in a system is to plug all interconnected gear into the same electrical circuit. Guitar players or vocalists with effects should plug those units into the same electrical outlet as their power stand is plugged into. This normally fixes all problems.

=== Can I use this 120-volt system in another country? ===

The unit does not have a universal power supply; use the 120V version only in 120V countries. Use the 240V version in countries with 220,230 or 240V systems at 50 Hz. We do not have a 100V system.

=== I need a longer NL4 cable for my B1 bass module. What are my options? ===

It is generally good practice to locate the B1 bass modules near the L1. If you require more length, ensure that it is a 4-conductor NL4 speaker cable. One vendor that we have used is [http://www.audiopile.net/ www.audiopile.net].

=== Are there any user-replaceable parts? ===

Yes. Certain user-replaceable parts are available for the product family. U.S. customers can contact our support department at 877-335-2673 for details.

=== Are the products repairable? To what extent? ===

Yes. The products are repairable. The power stand is currently repairable at the board level. Drivers, end caps, and grills can be replaced on the L1™ and B1 units.

=== What are the replacement costs? ===

U.S. customers may call 877-335-2673 or e-mail [mailto:support@Bose.com support@Bose.com] for further details.

== Appendix A: Accessories ==

The following accessories are available for the L1™ family of products.

{|border="2" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4" width="91%"
|align = "center"|'''Accessories'''
|align = "center"|'''Product Code'''

|-
|=== '''B1 bass module ''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|B1 bass module
|align = "center"|032494

|-
|B1 cable 5.5" (1.7m)
|align = "center"|035404

|-
|Standard B1 carrying cover
|align = "center"|035025

|-
|Heavy-duty B1 gig bag
|align = "center"|041785

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
|=== '''A1 amplifier''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|PackLite® power amplifier Model A1
|align = "center"|039057

|-
|Model A1 amplifier carry pouch
|align = "center"|039860

|-
|Model A1 ¼" TRS cable 18-in (0.5m)
|align = "center"|039861

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
|=== '''Model I ''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|Power stand power cord
|align = "center"|035393

|-
|R1 remote control
|align = "center"|035394

|-
|R1 7-pin cable (5m)
|align = "center"|035403

|-
|align = "center"|'''Accessories'''
|align = "center"|'''Product Code'''

|-
|R1 7-pin cable (10m)
|align = "center"|035411

|-
|L1 carry bags
|align = "center"|034273

|-
|Power stand fuse kit (120V)
|align = "center"|035408

|-
|Power stand protective plug
|align = "center"|035410

|-
|Heavy-duty power stand/L1™/duffle carrying bag set
|align = "center"|041784

|-
|Standard L1™ Model I power stand/L1™ carrying bag set
|align = "center"|034273

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
|=== '''Model II''' ===
|align = "center"| 

|-
|L1™ Model II Cylindrical Radiator® carry bag
|align = "center"|044023

|-
|L1™ Model II power stand carry bag
|align = "center"|044024

|-
|Heavy-duty power stand/L1™/duffle carrying bag set
|align = "center"|041784

|-
|Standard L1™ Model I power stand/L1™ carrying bag set
|align = "center"|034273

|-
| 
| 

|-
|=== '''T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine ''' ===
| 

|-
|T1 ToneMatch™ audio engine power supply
|align = "center"|042533

|-
|ToneMatch™ audio engine microphone stand bracket
|align = "center"|042535

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|-
| 
|align = "center"| 

|}

</noinclude>
[[Category:Model II]]
[[Category:FAQ]]

Template:F1 Model 812 FAQ

2026-10-05T04:48:07Z

ST:

<html>
<style>
.faq {
max-width:800px;
}
.faq details summary {
font-family: Verdana;
font-size: 1.2em;
}
.faq div p {
margin-left: 30px;
}
</style>

<h2>F1 Model 812 FAQ </h2>
<a href="index.php?title=F1_Model_812_Flexible_Array_Loudspeaker">
<img src="images/0/01/F1_812_Inside_Trimmed.jpg" style="max-width:25%;float:right;margin:5px;border:0" title="Bose F1 Model 812 full article" ></a>

<div class="faq" >
<details>
<summary>What is the F1 Model 812 system?</summary>
<div><p align="left">The Bose F1 Model 812 flexible array loudspeaker is the first powered loudspeaker that delivers the benefits of an adjustable array in a portable system package. Its unique flexible baffle allows you to tailor the loudspeaker’s vertical coverage to a wide variety of listening environments. Simply push or pull the array into position to create “Straight,” “C,” “J” or “Reverse J” coverage patterns. Once set, the system automatically updates the EQ to maintain optimum tonal balance for each coverage pattern. So whether you’re playing at floor level, on a stage, or facing raked seats or bleachers, you can adapt your PA to the room.</p> <p align="left">Engineered with an array of eight high-output drivers, a high-powered 12-inch woofer and a lower crossover point, the loudspeaker delivers full-range, high-SPL performance while maintaining vocal and midrange clarity that’s dramatically better than conventional loudspeakers.</p> <p align="left">The Bose F1 subwoofer packs all the power of a larger bass box into a more compact design that’s easier to carry and fits in a car. A mounting stand for the loudspeaker is stored right in the body of the subwoofer, making setup fast and easy. The stand even includes cable channels to neatly hide wires.</p> <p align="left">The loudspeaker and subwoofer combined deliver 2,000 watts of power, so you can fill nearly any room with sound.</p> <p align="left">And now getting there is easier, too. The loudspeaker and subwoofer feature strategically-placed handles for easy transportation.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>How is the F1 Model 812 different from a conventional PA?</summary>
<div><p align="left">Current popular powered loudspeakers are standard two-way designs consisting of a single horn-loaded compression driver for high-frequency reproduction and a single woofer for mid- and low-mid-frequency output.</p> <p align="left">Since the Bose F1 Model 812 loudspeaker has an array of eight high-output drivers, mid/high-frequency response is much cleaner and less harsh sounding when compared to a traditional horn.</p> <p align="left">Characteristically, horns have a fixed output pattern that isn’t adaptable to typical performance spaces. These fixed-pattern loudspeakers are commonly positioned on pole mount stands where high-frequency content is projected over listeners’ heads, making vocal intelligibility difficult. <strong></strong></p> <p align="left">The Bose F1 Model 812 flexible array is quite useful for quickly and easily adjusting the loudspeaker’s coverage for a variety of performance and listening spaces, ensuring quality reproduction without the need for complex placement.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>How does the flexible array work?</summary>
<div><p align="left">The eight drivers on the F1 Model 812 flexible array are mounted on a specially designed flexible baffle that is hinged in two locations. When the array position is changed, the loudspeaker’s internal EQ automatically changes according to the array’s position: “Straight,” “C,” “J” or “Reverse J.” This allows the loudspeaker to maintain tonal balance no matter which position is used.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Does the F1 Model 812 have a woofer?</summary>
<div><p>Yes. The high-output 12-inch woofer is mounted behind the flexible array.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Can I use the F1 Model 812 with a standard speaker stand?</summary>
<div><p>Yes, there is a pole cup on the bottom of the enclosure that accepts common tripod speaker stands.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What is the recommended subwoofer?</summary>
<div><p>For best performance, we recommend using the Bose F1 subwoofer. However, other powered subs can be connected to the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What is the F1 subwoofer?</summary>
<div><p>The F1 subwoofer is a compact bass module designed for use with the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker. Its powerful amplifier and dual drivers produce bass as much as subs nearly double its size.</p> <p>The F1 subwoofer features:</p><ul style="padding-left:20px"> <li>2 X 10" high-excursion drivers</li> <li>1,000 watts</li> <li>2 x input channel with XLR, 0.25-inch combo connector</li> <li>2 x XLR balanced line out</li> <li>Polarity reverse switch</li> <li>HPF enable</li> </ul> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>How many F1 subwoofers can you connect to an F1 Model 812 loudspeaker?</summary>
<div><p>We recommend one sub per F1 Model 812 loudspeaker. However, you can connect as many as needed.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Can the F1 systems be used with Bose L1® systems?</summary>
<div><p>Yes. Bose L1<sup>®</sup> systems can be used in conjunction with the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker as a supplemental fill or stage monitor.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Can it be used with the T1 ToneMatch<sup>&#9415</sup> audio engine?</summary>
<div><p>Yes. The F1 system is compatible with the ToneMatch audio engine.<strong> </strong>The T1 engine is a powerful multichannel audio device designed for musicians to use Bose portable pro loudspeaker systems. It includes our largest library of ToneMatch presets, proprietary EQ, a complete suite of studio-class effects and processing, and five channel inputs.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What sources can I plug into the mid/high?</summary>
<div><p>The rear panel of the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker is equipped with XLR/TS combo jacks, a 0.25-inch instrument jack and stereo RCA inputs. When an external mixer is not used, a wide variety of instruments or sources can be connected directly. Common sources include:</p><ul style="padding-left:20px"> <li>A dynamic microphone</li> <li>An acoustic instrument with a pickup system</li> <li>Electronic keyboard</li> <li>Electric bass guitar</li> <li>CD or MP3 player</li> </ul> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What are the weights and dimensions of the F1 Model 812 system?</summary>
<div><p><strong>F1 Model 812 loudspeaker</strong> <br />44.5 lbs. (20.18 kg) <br />26.1" H x 13.1" W x 14.6" D (664.66 x 334.3 x 372.5mm)</p> <p><strong>Shipping Weight:</strong> 54.5 lbs (24.72 kg)</p> <p><strong>F1 subwoofer</strong> <br />55 lbs. (24.9 kg) <br />27" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (688 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)</p> <p><strong>Shipping Weight:</strong> 65 lbs (29.4 kg)</p> <p><strong>F1 system stack</strong> <br />99.5 lbs (45.7 kg) <br />73.5" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (1868 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Does the system ship with carrying bags/covers?</summary>
<div><p>Bags and covers are available as optional accessories.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Are hard shell cases available for the products?</summary>
<div><p align="left">Bose does not offer any hard shell cases.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What is included in the F1 Model 812 box?</summary>
<div>
<ul>
<li>F1 Model 812 loudspeaker</li>
<li>AC power cord</li>
<li>F1 Model 812 Owner’s Guide</li>
</ul>
</div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What accessories are available?</summary>
<div>
<ul>
<li>Brackets </li>
<li>Bags and covers <br /><br /><ul> <li style="list-style: circle; margin-left:20px;">Full-range padded bag with zipper </li> <li style="list-style: circle">Subwoofer padded bag with zipper</li> <li style="list-style: circle">Subwoofer slipcover</li> </ul></li>
</ul>
</div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Can the F1 Model 812 system be used outdoors?</summary>
<div><p align="left">Yes. The system can be used inside or outside. However, it must never be exposed to precipitation or extended periods of direct sunlight. In cases of light rain, take precautions to cover the back panel of the loudspeaker. Water must not get into the air inlet slits inside the back I/O panel, handle recess or front grille.</p> <p>The system has been tested to operate in temperatures from 0° – 50° C (32° – 122° F), and be stored in temperatures from -30° – 70° C (-22° – 158° F).<strong></strong></p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Where can the F1 Model 812 system be used?</summary>
<div><p align="left">The F1 Model 812 loudspeaker and F1 subwoofer combination is suitable for bands of all musical styles, DJs and voice-only applications. Due to the versatility of the flexible array, the system also can be used in a wide range of locations.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What kinds of musical performers (singers, bands, DJs, etc.) can use the new technology? </summary>
<div><p>There are no restrictions in this regard. Any single voice, instrument and group size will benefit from the advantages of hearing themselves better, of being in complete control of their performance, of having audiences hear them better and of being able to set up and perform in just minutes.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Can DJs use this system?</summary>
<div><p align="left">Yes. The F1 Model 812 loudspeaker and F1 sub are ideal for DJs that want high power and sonic clarity in a portable system. The F1 subwoofer’s compact design and high capability eliminate the need for transporting subwoofers twice their size. Plus, the integrated stand eliminates ugly tripod bases that expose hanging wires and create tripping hazards.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Can acoustic instruments be amplified with the F1 Model 812 system?</summary>
<div><p align="left">Yes. When an external mixer is not in use, an acoustic instrument equipped with a pickup system may connect directly into the F1 Model 812 system.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Where can I purchase F1 flexible array systems in the United States?</summary>
<div><p>You can purchase F1 flexible array systems directly from Bose through one of the following methods:</p><ul style="margin-left:20px; "> <li>Call our Sales Solutions Team at 800-444-2673.</li> <li>Purchase on the web at Bose.com. Click on “Shop Online,” then “Speakers” and then “Portable PA.”</li> <li>Visit select Bose Stores that carry the F1 system.</li> </ul><p>All Bose direct purchases include a 45-day Better Music Guarantee. This means you can test any F1 flexible array system in your own environment and return it for a credit within 45 days of purchase. You are only responsible for the return shipping to Bose.</p> <p>You can also purchase F1 flexible array systems at Bose authorized resellers, such as:</p><ul style="margin-left:20px; "> <li>Guitar Center</li> <li>Musician’s Friend</li> <li>Sweetwater</li> <li>American Musical Supply</li> <li>zZounds</li> <li>Specialty dealers</li> </ul> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What is the warranty period on the F1 Model 812 system?</summary>
<div><p align="left">The F1<sup> </sup>Model 812 and F1 sub both carry a two-year limited warranty on electronics and a five-year warranty on transducers. Both warranties are transferable with the product even if the ownership changes.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>What is the 45-day Better Music Guarantee?</summary>
<div><p align="left">At Bose, we recognize that customers may want to experience the F1 flexible array system in their own environment with their specific gear. That is why we allow you to purchase and use the system in your specific application for up to 45 days. If for any reason you are not satisfied, you may return it for a refund. This offer is exclusive to Bose direct sales channels.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Where can I collaborate with Bose staff and existing owners to learn more about how the F1 Model 812 system can work for my specific application?</summary>
<div><p>We host a public forum that allows our helpful user community to share their experiences and collaborate in real time on topics that are important to them. You will find extensive, application-specific documentation and helpful hints. The forum is fully searchable and can be accessed at <a href="http://bose.infopop.cc/">http://Bose.infopop.cc</a>.</p> <p align="left">You may also contact our product support team and speak with our knowledgeable staff of musicians. They may be reached at 877-335-2673.</p> </div>
</details>
<details>
<summary>Are the products repairable? What are the replacement costs?</summary>
<div><p>Yes. Certain products are replaceable or repairable to an extent. U.S. customers may call 877-335-2673 or email support@Bose.com for further details. Customers outside of the U.S. should refer to their local Bose website.<strong></strong></p> </div>
</details>
</div>
</html>

<noinclude>----
[[Category:F1]]

<html>
<script src="http://toonz.ca/js/details.js"></script>
</html>
</noinclude>

----
[[Category:F1]]
[[Category:FAQ]]

F1 Model 812 Flexible Array Loudspeaker

2026-10-05T04:38:14Z

ST: /* Pictures */

<html>
<script src="/js/lightbox/js/jquery-1.11.0.min.js"></script>
<script src="/js/lightbox/js/lightbox.min.js"></script>
<link href="/js/lightbox/css/lightbox.css" rel="stylesheet" />
<meta name="viewport" content="initial-scale=1" />
<style>
iframe {
max-width="560";
height="auto"
}
</style>
</html>


=== Documentation ===

{{F1 Owners Guide}}



[https://assets.boseprofessional.com/m/20254d2f8d268ed4/original/tds_F1_Model812_ltr_EN.pdf F1 Model 812 Technical Data]

[https://assets.boseprofessional.com/m/fd960982a07ada8/original/tds_F1_Subwoofer_ltr_EN.pdf F1 Subwoofer Technical Data]

=== Video ===

<html>
<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/mNxzdZhSMcA" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/bB82hH31sXM" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<hr>
<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/YgNHS-pBu0Y" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/keUtck_F7es" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/iP0OoH66pgA" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</html>

=== F1 Model 812 Photos ===
{{F1 Model 812 Images}}

=== Coverage Patterns ===

===== Straight Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage Straight.jpg | 600px]]

<html>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/7/76/F1_Front_Straight.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-Straight"
data-title = "F1 Straight"
>
<img src="/bose/wiki/images/7/76/F1_Front_Straight.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/e/e6/F1_Front_Straight_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-Straight"
data-title = "F1 revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="/bose/wiki/images/e/e6/F1_Front_Straight_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>

</html>

===== J Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage J.jpg | 600px]]

<html>
<a href="images/b/b8/F1_Front_J.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-J"
data-title = "F1 J Array"
>
<img src="images/b/b8/F1_Front_J.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="images/8/84/F1_Front_J_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-J"
data-title = "F1 J Array revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/8/84/F1_Front_J_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>



===== Reverse J Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage Reverse J.jpg | 600px]]

<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/6/6d/F1_Front_Reverse_J.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 Reverse J Array"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/6/6d/F1_Front_Reverse_J.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/c/c7/F1_Front_Reverse_J_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 Reverse J Array revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/c/c7/F1_Front_Reverse_J_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>



===== C Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage C.jpg | 600px]]

<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/3b/F1_Front_C.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 C Array"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/3b/F1_Front_C.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/f/fd/F1_Front_C_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 C Array revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/f/fd/F1_Front_C_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>




=== Bottom / Top ===
<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/5/57/F1_Model_812_Bottom.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812 Bottom"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Bottom"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/5/57/F1_Model_812_Bottom.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>
<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/39/F1_Model_812_Top.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812 Bottom"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Top"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/39/F1_Model_812_Top.jpg"
style="nax-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>

=== Rear Panel IO ===

[[File:F1 Model 812 Rear IO.jpg| 600px | F1 Model 812 IO Panel]]

==== Volume Controls and Signal / Clip lights ====

Typically you will want to set your source (usually a mixer or {{T1}} or {{ToneMatch Mixer}}) to the maximum you can without clipping. On a mixer this may be shown as unity or 0.

When setting the Volume Control on the F1 Model 812 you can turn up the Volume Control until you see solid red, and then turn it down a little. Occasional red flickers (up to a second long) are okay. This may start to happen at -5 dB before clipping or with transient peaks. You will see these to warn you when you are approaching clipping. If you see solid red then you may be clipping.

[[Image:F1 812 IO Clip Limiter.png|600px|F1 Model 812 IO panel clip limiter lights]]

It is completely fine to turn up the Volume well beyond 12:00 o'clock if you need to.

After you have found the maximum volume available you can control the system volume at the source. You probably won't have to change this setting on the F1 Model 812 unless you use a different source.

You won't damage the system if the red lights are visible. The internal limiter will protect the system. You can tell when the limiter is working. The yellow limiter light will come on.

==== EQ ====

[[Image:F1 Input Panel EQ.png.png|800px]]

{{:F1 Model 812 EQ Selector Switches}}

==== Input 1 ====

The SIGNAL INPUT switch sets the input sensitivity. The MIC setting does not apply any microphone specific EQ. In this way, it is different from the {{Compact}} Channel 1 input. Ideally the F1 Model 812 should receive a input level of +24 dBu to use the Line Level setting. If your source has an output level lower than that it's perfectly okay to use the MIC setting.

[[Image:F1 Input Panel Signal Input.png]]

==== Input 2 Volume Control / Mute ====
Turning the Volume Controls all the way down sets the input to its lowest level but a strong signal may still be audible. This does not indicate a malfunction.





=== Use Case Scenarios ===
==== Quick Start Guide ====

[[Image:F1 Quick Start Guide.png|600px]]

==== Stereo + Mixer ====

[[Image:F1 Stereo+Mixer.png|600px]]

==== Stereo + Mixer + 1 Sub ====

[[Image:F1 Stereo+DJ Mixer+1Sub.png|600px]]

==== Stereo + DJ Mixer + 2 Subs ====

[[Image:F1 Stereo+DJ Mixer+2Sub.png|600px]]

==== Single Stand-alone ====

[[Image:F1 Single standalone.png|600px]]

=== {{T1}} ===

Please see: [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine to F1 System]]

[[File:T1 to F1 Model 812 Mono 600.png|link=T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine to F1 System|T1 to F1]]

--== Please click the picture above to see the full article ==--



=== {{F1}} Digital Signal Processing (DSP) ===
[[File:Dispersion Patterns.jpg|300 px|right]]
There is Digital Signal Processing in the F1 Model 812. It automatically optimizes the equalization to suit the position of the Flexible array (Straight, J, Reverse-J, C) and responds to the EQ switch (FULL RANGE/WITH SUB) so you can use the F1 Model 812 with the F1 Subwoofer. There's no mention of the DSP in those terms because this all happens automatically. The DSP is not user accessible except by changing the position of the flexible array and the EQ switch.

==== Why Does the F1 Model 812 Passive Require Digital Signal Processing ====
The F1 Model 812 Passive requires active equalization because the F1 Model 812 Passive does not have a amplifiers or digital signal processing. Looking at the documentation for the [https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/AM740742_02_printable.pdf Bose F1 Model 812 Passive Loudspeaker Installation and Safety Guidelines] you will find a section about the active equalization that must be provided for the F1 Model 812 Passive to provide infrasonic bandpass protection, amplifier power limiting and active equalization.

[[File:F1 Model 812 Passive DSP.png|600px]]

If you read further in the [https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/AM740742_02_printable.pdf Bose F1 Model 812 Passive Loudspeaker Installation and Safety Guidelines] you will find recommended settings when using external processing. The F1 Model 812 uses similar settings.

=== Frequently Asked Questions ===
==== F1 Model 812 and F1 Subwoofer ====
{{F1 Model 812 FAQ}}

=== Rotate the Logos ===
If you want to operate the F1 Model 812 horizontally, you can rotate the logos so they are parallel with the floor.

Gently - pull the logo straight out about 1/4" of an inch.

No tools required: I used my fingers above and below the OS in B'''OS'''E. Do not pull on the tails in the B or E.

It's spring loaded. So pull it straight out about 1/4" and then you can rotate it 90° at a time in any direction. Then when you release it, it should slip back flush with the grille.

<html>
<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Pwq4JceqGs" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</html>

=== Odor ===
April 19, 2016

On behalf of the Bose Professional Team:

Hello F1 Loudspeaker Group!

It’s come to our attention that some of our users are concerned about a smell coming out of F1 Subwoofers during the first few usages. This smell is out-gassing and it is actually normal for an odor to be released from a new loudspeaker. This is a release of chemicals due to temperature or pressure. In almost all cases this goes away after the first few uses of the product. If anyone feels their product is behaving abnormally, we encourage our users to reach out to our support department.

Call Bose® Product & Technical Support at (877) 335-2673 (U.S. and Canada only)
Monday-Friday: 9:00 AM - 9:00 PM ET

If there is any additional news from Bose about this, it will be posted on the Bose Forum.
http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6120043776/m/2950036286
— Source: [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6120043776/m/2950036286 Bose Forum]

=== Grille Removal ===
==== Front Grille ====

[[File:F1 Front Grille Removal.jpg|800px]]

==== Side Grille ====

[[File:F1 Side Grille Removal.jpg|800px]]

=== Physical Data ===
==== F1 Model 812 ====
<p>
<strong>Enclosure</strong>
<br>F1 Model 812: High impact composite materials </p>
<p>
<strong>Dimensions</strong>
<br>F1 Model 812 loudspeaker: 26.1" H x 13.1" W x 14.6" D (664.66 x 334.3 x 372.5mm)<br>F1 system stack: 73.5" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (1868 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)</p>
<p>
<strong>Net Weight</strong>

<section begin=F1 Weight />
F1 Model 812 loudspeaker: 44.5 lbs (20.18 kg)

F1 system stack: 99.5 lbs (45.7 kg)
<section end=F1 Weight />
</p>
<p>
<strong>Color</strong>
<br>Black</p>
<p>
<strong>Package Contents</strong>
<br>1 F1 Model 812<br>1 IEC Line Cord<br>1 Owner’s Guide</p>

== F1 Subwoofer ==
<div style="max-width:1024px;">
=== Input Output Panel ===
<div style="float:right; max-width:400px">
[[File:F1 Subwoofer IO Panel.png|link=https://assets.bose.com/content/dam/Bose_DAM/Web/consumer_electronics/global/accessories/speakers/f1_subwoofer/pdf/f1_subwoofer_PDF_ownersguide_MULTI.pdf|375px]]
</div>
<div style="max-width:600px">
====LINE OUTPUT 1 & 2====
Individual outputs that provide balanced line output signals (pre-volume control) that can be sent to powered loudspeakers or additional subwoofers.

Note: When the LINE OUTPUT EQ selector switch is set to THRU, the LINE OUTPUT signal will be full range.

LINE INPUT 1 & 2: Combination XLR – ¼" phone connector inputs that accept line level signals.

The INPUTS 1 & 2 remain distinct at the LINE OUTPUTS 1 & 2. They are not summed.

==== POLARITY ====
* ''''NORM'''' is used when the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker is mounted on the supplied stand.
* ''''REV'''' may be used to better align the bass when the subwoofer is located further away from the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker.

==== FRONT LED selector switch ====
* ''''POWER'''' enables LED to indicate power status.
* ''''LIMIT'''' enables LED to indicate limiting.
* ''''OFF'''' turns off LED.

==== POWER/FAULT ====
Indicates power/fault status
* Blue = power on.
* Red = fault condition.

==== LIMIT ====
Amber = system limiting

==== SIGNAL / CLIP ====
Displays the input signal status in color.
* Green = signal present.
* Red = signal clipping - input signal too high.

==== VOLUME ====
Adjusts subwoofer volume. Middle detent position is 0dB – nominal position when the F1 Model 812 and F1 Subwoofer are connected to a mixing console. Use 0dB position for a line-level signal input.

==== LINE OUTPUT Signal Path ====
[[File:F1 Subwoofer Line Outputs unaffected by volume.png|300px]]

==== LINE OUTPUT EQ ====
* ''''THRU'''' passes input signal to the output with no filtering. Recommended when using with F1 Model 812.
* ''''HPF'''' passes input through a high-pass (100 Hz) filter. Affects LINE OUTPUT signals only.
</div>

===== Setting EQ Selector Switches =====
Recommended settings for the EQ selector switches on the F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker and the F1 Subwoofer are describe in the following table.
<table class="wikitable" >
<tr><th>System Setup</th><th>F1 Model 812 EQ Switch</th><th>F1 Subwoofer LINE OUTPUT EQ Switch</th></tr>

<tr>
<td>F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker used without F1 Subwoofer</td>
<td>FULL RANGE</td>
<td>Not applicable</td>
</tr>

<tr>
<td>Signal input to F1 Subwoofer, F1 Subwoofer output to F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker</td>
<td>WITH SUB</td>
<td>THRU</td>
</tr>

<tr>
<td>Signal input to F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker, F1 Model 812 output to F1 Subwoofer</td>
<td>FULL RANGE or WITH SUB</td>
<td>No effect</td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
[[File:F1 Subwoofer IO Panel with notes.png|link=https://assets.bose.com/content/dam/Bose_DAM/Web/consumer_electronics/global/accessories/speakers/f1_subwoofer/pdf/f1_subwoofer_PDF_ownersguide_MULTI.pdf|thumb|F1 Subwoofer IO Panel with Notes]]

=== Pictures ===
<html>
<style>
.horizontalThumbs {height:150px; border: 0 none;}
</style>
<a href="images/8/8b/F1_Subwoofer_Front.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/8/8b/F1_Subwoofer_Front.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="images/0/01/F1_Subwoofer_Front_Without_Grille.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer without Grille"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/0/01/F1_Subwoofer_Front_Without_Grille.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="images/5/55/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Top_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Top"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/5/55/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Top_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="images/d/d1/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Rear View"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/d/d1/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="images/1/1e/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Rear Left Angle View"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/1/1e/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="images/e/e5/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Laying_on_Side.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Laying on Side"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/e/e5/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Laying_on_Side.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="images/0/00/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Left Angle View"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/0/00/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/2/2a/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View_Without_Grille.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Left Angle View Without Grille"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/2/2a/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View_Without_Grille.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>
</html>

<strong>Enclosure</strong>
<br>F1 Subwoofer: Wood cabinet with high impact composite end caps</p>
<p>
<strong>Dimensions</strong>
<br>F1 Subwoofer: 27" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (688 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)<br>F1 system stack: 73.5" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (1868 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)</p>
<p>
<strong>Net Weight</strong>
<br>F1 Subwoofer: 55 lbs (24.9 kg)<br>F1 system stack: 99.5 lbs (45.7 kg)</p>
<p>
<strong>Color</strong>
<br>Black</p>
<p>
<strong>Package Contents</strong>
<br>1 F1 Subwoofer<br>1 F1 Subwoofer stand<br>1 IEC Line Cord<br>1 Owner’s Guide</p>

=== F1 Subwoofer FAQ ===
{{F1 Subwoofer FAQ}}

== F1 Passive FAQ ==
{{F1 Passive FAQ}}

{{Details.js}}
----
[[category:F1]]

F1 Model 812 Flexible Array Loudspeaker

2026-10-05T04:35:01Z

ST: /* J Array */

<html>
<script src="/js/lightbox/js/jquery-1.11.0.min.js"></script>
<script src="/js/lightbox/js/lightbox.min.js"></script>
<link href="/js/lightbox/css/lightbox.css" rel="stylesheet" />
<meta name="viewport" content="initial-scale=1" />
<style>
iframe {
max-width="560";
height="auto"
}
</style>
</html>


=== Documentation ===

{{F1 Owners Guide}}



[https://assets.boseprofessional.com/m/20254d2f8d268ed4/original/tds_F1_Model812_ltr_EN.pdf F1 Model 812 Technical Data]

[https://assets.boseprofessional.com/m/fd960982a07ada8/original/tds_F1_Subwoofer_ltr_EN.pdf F1 Subwoofer Technical Data]

=== Video ===

<html>
<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/mNxzdZhSMcA" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/bB82hH31sXM" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<hr>
<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/YgNHS-pBu0Y" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/keUtck_F7es" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>

<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/iP0OoH66pgA" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</html>

=== F1 Model 812 Photos ===
{{F1 Model 812 Images}}

=== Coverage Patterns ===

===== Straight Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage Straight.jpg | 600px]]

<html>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/7/76/F1_Front_Straight.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-Straight"
data-title = "F1 Straight"
>
<img src="/bose/wiki/images/7/76/F1_Front_Straight.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/e/e6/F1_Front_Straight_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-Straight"
data-title = "F1 revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="/bose/wiki/images/e/e6/F1_Front_Straight_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>

</html>

===== J Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage J.jpg | 600px]]

<html>
<a href="images/b/b8/F1_Front_J.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-J"
data-title = "F1 J Array"
>
<img src="images/b/b8/F1_Front_J.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="images/8/84/F1_Front_J_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-J"
data-title = "F1 J Array revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/8/84/F1_Front_J_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>



===== Reverse J Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage Reverse J.jpg | 600px]]

<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/6/6d/F1_Front_Reverse_J.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 Reverse J Array"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/6/6d/F1_Front_Reverse_J.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/c/c7/F1_Front_Reverse_J_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 Reverse J Array revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/c/c7/F1_Front_Reverse_J_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>



===== C Array =====

[[Image: F1 Coverage C.jpg | 600px]]

<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/3b/F1_Front_C.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 C Array"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/3b/F1_Front_C.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none"
title = "click to zoom"
>
</a>

<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/f/fd/F1_Front_C_revealed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1-RJ"
data-title = "F1 C Array revealed"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/f/fd/F1_Front_C_revealed.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>




=== Bottom / Top ===
<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/5/57/F1_Model_812_Bottom.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812 Bottom"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Bottom"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/5/57/F1_Model_812_Bottom.jpg"
style="max-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>
<html>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/39/F1_Model_812_Top.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812 Bottom"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Top"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/3/39/F1_Model_812_Top.jpg"
style="nax-width: 400px; border: 0 none">
</a>
</html>

=== Rear Panel IO ===

[[File:F1 Model 812 Rear IO.jpg| 600px | F1 Model 812 IO Panel]]

==== Volume Controls and Signal / Clip lights ====

Typically you will want to set your source (usually a mixer or {{T1}} or {{ToneMatch Mixer}}) to the maximum you can without clipping. On a mixer this may be shown as unity or 0.

When setting the Volume Control on the F1 Model 812 you can turn up the Volume Control until you see solid red, and then turn it down a little. Occasional red flickers (up to a second long) are okay. This may start to happen at -5 dB before clipping or with transient peaks. You will see these to warn you when you are approaching clipping. If you see solid red then you may be clipping.

[[Image:F1 812 IO Clip Limiter.png|600px|F1 Model 812 IO panel clip limiter lights]]

It is completely fine to turn up the Volume well beyond 12:00 o'clock if you need to.

After you have found the maximum volume available you can control the system volume at the source. You probably won't have to change this setting on the F1 Model 812 unless you use a different source.

You won't damage the system if the red lights are visible. The internal limiter will protect the system. You can tell when the limiter is working. The yellow limiter light will come on.

==== EQ ====

[[Image:F1 Input Panel EQ.png.png|800px]]

{{:F1 Model 812 EQ Selector Switches}}

==== Input 1 ====

The SIGNAL INPUT switch sets the input sensitivity. The MIC setting does not apply any microphone specific EQ. In this way, it is different from the {{Compact}} Channel 1 input. Ideally the F1 Model 812 should receive a input level of +24 dBu to use the Line Level setting. If your source has an output level lower than that it's perfectly okay to use the MIC setting.

[[Image:F1 Input Panel Signal Input.png]]

==== Input 2 Volume Control / Mute ====
Turning the Volume Controls all the way down sets the input to its lowest level but a strong signal may still be audible. This does not indicate a malfunction.





=== Use Case Scenarios ===
==== Quick Start Guide ====

[[Image:F1 Quick Start Guide.png|600px]]

==== Stereo + Mixer ====

[[Image:F1 Stereo+Mixer.png|600px]]

==== Stereo + Mixer + 1 Sub ====

[[Image:F1 Stereo+DJ Mixer+1Sub.png|600px]]

==== Stereo + DJ Mixer + 2 Subs ====

[[Image:F1 Stereo+DJ Mixer+2Sub.png|600px]]

==== Single Stand-alone ====

[[Image:F1 Single standalone.png|600px]]

=== {{T1}} ===

Please see: [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine to F1 System]]

[[File:T1 to F1 Model 812 Mono 600.png|link=T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine to F1 System|T1 to F1]]

--== Please click the picture above to see the full article ==--



=== {{F1}} Digital Signal Processing (DSP) ===
[[File:Dispersion Patterns.jpg|300 px|right]]
There is Digital Signal Processing in the F1 Model 812. It automatically optimizes the equalization to suit the position of the Flexible array (Straight, J, Reverse-J, C) and responds to the EQ switch (FULL RANGE/WITH SUB) so you can use the F1 Model 812 with the F1 Subwoofer. There's no mention of the DSP in those terms because this all happens automatically. The DSP is not user accessible except by changing the position of the flexible array and the EQ switch.

==== Why Does the F1 Model 812 Passive Require Digital Signal Processing ====
The F1 Model 812 Passive requires active equalization because the F1 Model 812 Passive does not have a amplifiers or digital signal processing. Looking at the documentation for the [https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/AM740742_02_printable.pdf Bose F1 Model 812 Passive Loudspeaker Installation and Safety Guidelines] you will find a section about the active equalization that must be provided for the F1 Model 812 Passive to provide infrasonic bandpass protection, amplifier power limiting and active equalization.

[[File:F1 Model 812 Passive DSP.png|600px]]

If you read further in the [https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/AM740742_02_printable.pdf Bose F1 Model 812 Passive Loudspeaker Installation and Safety Guidelines] you will find recommended settings when using external processing. The F1 Model 812 uses similar settings.

=== Frequently Asked Questions ===
==== F1 Model 812 and F1 Subwoofer ====
{{F1 Model 812 FAQ}}

=== Rotate the Logos ===
If you want to operate the F1 Model 812 horizontally, you can rotate the logos so they are parallel with the floor.

Gently - pull the logo straight out about 1/4" of an inch.

No tools required: I used my fingers above and below the OS in B'''OS'''E. Do not pull on the tails in the B or E.

It's spring loaded. So pull it straight out about 1/4" and then you can rotate it 90° at a time in any direction. Then when you release it, it should slip back flush with the grille.

<html>
<iframe src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/0Pwq4JceqGs" frameborder="0" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</html>

=== Odor ===
April 19, 2016

On behalf of the Bose Professional Team:

Hello F1 Loudspeaker Group!

It’s come to our attention that some of our users are concerned about a smell coming out of F1 Subwoofers during the first few usages. This smell is out-gassing and it is actually normal for an odor to be released from a new loudspeaker. This is a release of chemicals due to temperature or pressure. In almost all cases this goes away after the first few uses of the product. If anyone feels their product is behaving abnormally, we encourage our users to reach out to our support department.

Call Bose® Product & Technical Support at (877) 335-2673 (U.S. and Canada only)
Monday-Friday: 9:00 AM - 9:00 PM ET

If there is any additional news from Bose about this, it will be posted on the Bose Forum.
http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6120043776/m/2950036286
— Source: [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6120043776/m/2950036286 Bose Forum]

=== Grille Removal ===
==== Front Grille ====

[[File:F1 Front Grille Removal.jpg|800px]]

==== Side Grille ====

[[File:F1 Side Grille Removal.jpg|800px]]

=== Physical Data ===
==== F1 Model 812 ====
<p>
<strong>Enclosure</strong>
<br>F1 Model 812: High impact composite materials </p>
<p>
<strong>Dimensions</strong>
<br>F1 Model 812 loudspeaker: 26.1" H x 13.1" W x 14.6" D (664.66 x 334.3 x 372.5mm)<br>F1 system stack: 73.5" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (1868 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)</p>
<p>
<strong>Net Weight</strong>

<section begin=F1 Weight />
F1 Model 812 loudspeaker: 44.5 lbs (20.18 kg)

F1 system stack: 99.5 lbs (45.7 kg)
<section end=F1 Weight />
</p>
<p>
<strong>Color</strong>
<br>Black</p>
<p>
<strong>Package Contents</strong>
<br>1 F1 Model 812<br>1 IEC Line Cord<br>1 Owner’s Guide</p>

== F1 Subwoofer ==
<div style="max-width:1024px;">
=== Input Output Panel ===
<div style="float:right; max-width:400px">
[[File:F1 Subwoofer IO Panel.png|link=https://assets.bose.com/content/dam/Bose_DAM/Web/consumer_electronics/global/accessories/speakers/f1_subwoofer/pdf/f1_subwoofer_PDF_ownersguide_MULTI.pdf|375px]]
</div>
<div style="max-width:600px">
====LINE OUTPUT 1 & 2====
Individual outputs that provide balanced line output signals (pre-volume control) that can be sent to powered loudspeakers or additional subwoofers.

Note: When the LINE OUTPUT EQ selector switch is set to THRU, the LINE OUTPUT signal will be full range.

LINE INPUT 1 & 2: Combination XLR – ¼" phone connector inputs that accept line level signals.

The INPUTS 1 & 2 remain distinct at the LINE OUTPUTS 1 & 2. They are not summed.

==== POLARITY ====
* ''''NORM'''' is used when the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker is mounted on the supplied stand.
* ''''REV'''' may be used to better align the bass when the subwoofer is located further away from the F1 Model 812 loudspeaker.

==== FRONT LED selector switch ====
* ''''POWER'''' enables LED to indicate power status.
* ''''LIMIT'''' enables LED to indicate limiting.
* ''''OFF'''' turns off LED.

==== POWER/FAULT ====
Indicates power/fault status
* Blue = power on.
* Red = fault condition.

==== LIMIT ====
Amber = system limiting

==== SIGNAL / CLIP ====
Displays the input signal status in color.
* Green = signal present.
* Red = signal clipping - input signal too high.

==== VOLUME ====
Adjusts subwoofer volume. Middle detent position is 0dB – nominal position when the F1 Model 812 and F1 Subwoofer are connected to a mixing console. Use 0dB position for a line-level signal input.

==== LINE OUTPUT Signal Path ====
[[File:F1 Subwoofer Line Outputs unaffected by volume.png|300px]]

==== LINE OUTPUT EQ ====
* ''''THRU'''' passes input signal to the output with no filtering. Recommended when using with F1 Model 812.
* ''''HPF'''' passes input through a high-pass (100 Hz) filter. Affects LINE OUTPUT signals only.
</div>

===== Setting EQ Selector Switches =====
Recommended settings for the EQ selector switches on the F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker and the F1 Subwoofer are describe in the following table.
<table class="wikitable" >
<tr><th>System Setup</th><th>F1 Model 812 EQ Switch</th><th>F1 Subwoofer LINE OUTPUT EQ Switch</th></tr>

<tr>
<td>F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker used without F1 Subwoofer</td>
<td>FULL RANGE</td>
<td>Not applicable</td>
</tr>

<tr>
<td>Signal input to F1 Subwoofer, F1 Subwoofer output to F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker</td>
<td>WITH SUB</td>
<td>THRU</td>
</tr>

<tr>
<td>Signal input to F1 Model 812 Loudspeaker, F1 Model 812 output to F1 Subwoofer</td>
<td>FULL RANGE or WITH SUB</td>
<td>No effect</td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
[[File:F1 Subwoofer IO Panel with notes.png|link=https://assets.bose.com/content/dam/Bose_DAM/Web/consumer_electronics/global/accessories/speakers/f1_subwoofer/pdf/f1_subwoofer_PDF_ownersguide_MULTI.pdf|thumb|F1 Subwoofer IO Panel with Notes]]

=== Pictures ===
<html>
<style>
.horizontalThumbs {height:150px; border: 0 none;}
</style>
<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/8b/F1_Subwoofer_Front.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/8b/F1_Subwoofer_Front.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/01/F1_Subwoofer_Front_Without_Grille.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer without Grille"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/01/F1_Subwoofer_Front_Without_Grille.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/5/55/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Top_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Top"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="/bose/wiki/images/5/55/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Top_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/d/d1/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Rear View"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/d/d1/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/1/1e/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Rear Left Angle View"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/1/1e/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Rear_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/e/e5/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Laying_on_Side.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Laying on Side"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/e/e5/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Laying_on_Side.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/0/00/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Left Angle View"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/00/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>

<a href="/bose/wiki/images/2/2a/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View_Without_Grille.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Subwoofer"
data-title = "F1 Subwoofer Left Angle View Without Grille"
title = "click to zoom"
>
<img src="https://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/2/2a/Bose_F1_Subwoofer_Front_Left_Angle_View_Without_Grille.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs">
</a>
</html>

<strong>Enclosure</strong>
<br>F1 Subwoofer: Wood cabinet with high impact composite end caps</p>
<p>
<strong>Dimensions</strong>
<br>F1 Subwoofer: 27" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (688 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)<br>F1 system stack: 73.5" H x 16.1" W x 17.6" D (1868 x 410.16 x 448.5mm)</p>
<p>
<strong>Net Weight</strong>
<br>F1 Subwoofer: 55 lbs (24.9 kg)<br>F1 system stack: 99.5 lbs (45.7 kg)</p>
<p>
<strong>Color</strong>
<br>Black</p>
<p>
<strong>Package Contents</strong>
<br>1 F1 Subwoofer<br>1 F1 Subwoofer stand<br>1 IEC Line Cord<br>1 Owner’s Guide</p>

=== F1 Subwoofer FAQ ===
{{F1 Subwoofer FAQ}}

== F1 Passive FAQ ==
{{F1 Passive FAQ}}

{{Details.js}}
----
[[category:F1]]

Template:F1 Model 812 Images

2026-10-05T04:32:17Z

ST:

<noinclude>
;F1 Model 812 Images
<br>Click to zoom, click zoomed image to scroll through all.

<html>
<script src="http://toonz.ca/js/lightbox/js/jquery-1.11.0.min.js"></script>
<script src="http://toonz.ca/js/lightbox/js/lightbox.min.js"></script>
<link href="http://toonz.ca/js/lightbox/css/lightbox.css" rel="stylesheet" />
</html>
</noinclude>
<html>
<style>
.horizontalThumbs8150{height:150px; border:0 none;}
</style>

<a href="images/3/34/F1_Model_812_Dispersion_Patterns.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Dispersion patterns"
title = "F1 Model 812 Dispersion patterns - click to zoom"
>
<img src="images/3/34/F1_Model_812_Dispersion_Patterns.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/1/1e/F1_Model_812_Front_Straight.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Straight"
title = "F1 Model 812 Straight"
>
<img src="images/1/1e/F1_Model_812_Front_Straight.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/a/ad/F1_Model_812_Front_Straight_Grille_Removed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Straight Grille Removed"
title = "F1 Model 812 Straight Grille Removed"
>
<img src="images/a/ad/F1_Model_812_Front_Straight_Grille_Removed.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/9/97/F1_Model_812_Front_J_angle.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 J pattern"
title = "F1 Model 812 J pattern"
>
<img src="images/9/97/F1_Model_812_Front_J_angle.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/4/44/F1_Model_812_Front_J_Grille_Removed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 J Grille Removed"
title = "F1 Model 812 J Grille Removed"
>
<img src="images/4/44/F1_Model_812_Front_J_Grille_Removed.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/a/ad/F1_Model_812_Front_Reverse_J.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Reverse J"
title = "F1 Model 812 Reverse J"
>
<img src="images/a/ad/F1_Model_812_Front_Reverse_J.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/2/2e/F1_Model_812_Front_Reverse_J_Grille_Removed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Reverse J Grille Removed"
title = "F1 Model 812 Reverse J Grille Removed"
>
<img src="images/2/2e/F1_Model_812_Front_Reverse_J_Grille_Removed.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/2/2a/F1_Model_812_Front_C.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 C pattern"
title = "F1 Model 812 C pattern"
>
<img src="images/2/2a/F1_Model_812_Front_C.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/1/1d/F1_Model_812_Front_C_Grille_Removed.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 C Grille Removed"
title = "F1 Model 812 C Grille Removed"
>
<img src="images/1/1d/F1_Model_812_Front_C_Grille_Removed.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/0/00/F1_Model_812_Rear.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Rear"
title = "F1 Model 812 Rear"
>
<img src="images/0/00/F1_Model_812_Rear.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/f/fb/F1_Model_812_Rear_Panel.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Rear"
title = "F1 Model 812 Rear"
>
<img src="images/f/fb/F1_Model_812_Rear_Panel.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>

<a href="images/1/1e/F1_Model_812_Rear_angle.jpg"
data-lightbox = "F1 Model 812"
data-title = "F1 Model 812 Rear I/O Panel"
title = "F1 Model 812 Rear I/O Panel"
>
<img src="images/1/1e/F1_Model_812_Rear_angle.jpg"
class="horizontalThumbs8150">
</a>
</html>
<noinclude>
----
[[Category:F1 Model 812]]
[[Category:F1]]
</noinclude>

S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro

2026-10-05T04:02:11Z

ST:

{{L1 Pro icon}}{{S1 Pro+ icon}}
{{DivToc

|RightHead = S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro

|RightBody = Connect an S1 Pro+ to an L1 Pro

You will connect your microphone and/or instruments and/or Bluetooth audio to the S1 Pro+. The mix as you hear it from the S1 Pro+ will be sent to the L1 Pro.

The objective is to use the S1 Pro+ as the stage monitor facing the performer(s) and the L1 Pro will be the main loudspeaker for the audience; the Front of House system (FOH).

[[File:S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro1.jpg|300px|Right]]

|Categories =

[[Category:S1 Pro+]]
[[Category:L1 Pro]]
[[Category:Daisy Chain]]
[[Category:Connections]]
}}

====Terms used====

;S1 Pro+ (stage monitor and mixer)
:This is the S1 Pro+ to which you have connected your microphone and or instruments using inputs 1, 2, 3

;L1 Pro (main loudspeaker for the audience - Front of House)
:This is the L1 Pro to which you send the sound from S1 Pro+

==== Set Up ====
# S1 Pro+ Turn down the volume on all channels.
# L1 Pro
#* Turn down the volume on all channels.
#* Set Bass and Treble at 12:00 o'clock (flat)
#* Set Reverb off
#* Set ToneMatch to Off on channels 1 and 2

==== XLR Cable ====
Use an XLR cable (e.g., microphone cable) to connect the S1 Pro+ Line Out to L1 Pro channel 1 or 2.
*The advantage to this method is XLR cables are common and easily found
*The disadvantage is you takes up a full-featured channel on the L1 Pro
[[File:S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro2.jpg|800px]]

==== XLR to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve ====
Use an XLR to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve cable
*The advantage to this method is this leaves both full-featured channels (1 & 2) on the L1 Pro available for other uses
[[File:S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro3.jpg|800px]]

<br>or use an XLR cable with a converter<br>[[File:XLR cable.jpg|300px]][[File:XLR Female to 14 TRS Adapter.jpg|200px]]

==== Levels ====
# On S1 Pro+, bring up the channel volumes to the desired levels
# On L1 Pro, bring up the channel volume to suit your application. Note: This will not necessarily match the same position on the dials as S1 Pro+
# Turn down the volume on any unused channels

----
[[Category:S1 Pro+]]
[[Category:L1 Pro]]
[[Category:Connections]]
[[Category:Daisy Chain]]

S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro

2026-10-05T04:01:08Z

ST:

{{L1 Pro icon}}{{S1 Pro+ icon}}
{{DivToc

|RightHead = S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro

|RightBody = Connect an S1 Pro+ to an L1 Pro

You will connect your microphone and/or instruments and/or Bluetooth audio to the S1 Pro+

The objective is to use the S1 Pro+ as the stage monitor facing the performer(s) and the L1 Pro will be the main loudspeaker for the audience; the Front of House system (FOH).

[[File:S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro1.jpg|300px|Right]]

|Categories =

[[Category:S1 Pro+]]
[[Category:L1 Pro]]
[[Category:Daisy Chain]]
[[Category:Connections]]
}}

====Terms used====

;S1 Pro+ (stage monitor and mixer)
:This is the S1 Pro+ to which you have connected your microphone and or instruments using inputs 1, 2, 3

;L1 Pro (main loudspeaker for the audience - Front of House)
:This is the L1 Pro to which you send the sound from S1 Pro+

==== Set Up ====
# S1 Pro+ Turn down the volume on all channels.
# L1 Pro
#* Turn down the volume on all channels.
#* Set Bass and Treble at 12:00 o'clock (flat)
#* Set Reverb off
#* Set ToneMatch to Off on channels 1 and 2

==== XLR Cable ====
Use an XLR cable (e.g., microphone cable) to connect the S1 Pro+ Line Out to L1 Pro channel 1 or 2.
*The advantage to this method is XLR cables are common and easily found
*The disadvantage is you takes up a full-featured channel on the L1 Pro
[[File:S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro2.jpg|800px]]

==== XLR to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve ====
Use an XLR to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve cable
*The advantage to this method is this leaves both full-featured channels (1 & 2) on the L1 Pro available for other uses
[[File:S1 Pro+ to L1 Pro3.jpg|800px]]

<br>or use an XLR cable with a converter<br>[[File:XLR cable.jpg|300px]][[File:XLR Female to 14 TRS Adapter.jpg|200px]]

==== Levels ====
# On S1 Pro+, bring up the channel volumes to the desired levels
# On L1 Pro, bring up the channel volume to suit your application. Note: This will not necessarily match the same position on the dials as S1 Pro+
# Turn down the volume on any unused channels

----
[[Category:S1 Pro+]]
[[Category:L1 Pro]]
[[Category:Connections]]
[[Category:Daisy Chain]]

S1 Pro+ Sub EQ

2026-10-04T16:12:13Z

ST:

{{Sub icon}}{{S1 Pro+ icon}}
{{DivToc

|RightHead = Sub EQ

|RightBody = The Sub EQ setting is a crossover that optimizes system EQ when you connect a powered subwoofer to the system LINE OUT port. The Sub EQ affects the combined inputs of all inputs (one, two, and three, including Bluetooth)

You can use Sub EQ with any powered subwoofer, but for optimal performance, Bose recommends the Bose Sub1 or Sub2 Powered Bass Module.

Once you enable Sub EQ, it stays enabled until you disable it or the system powers off.

With the Sub EQ mode you can use the {{S1 Pro+}} internal mixer as the sound source (e.g., microphone and guitar and backing tracks via Bluetooth). This is different from the {{S1 Pro}} where the preferred method was to route all sound sources to the Sub1/Sub2 first and from the Sub1/Sub2 to the {{S1 Pro}}. This is because the {{S1 Pro}} did not have the Sub EQ mode.

;Sub EQ, Dual Wireless Streaming, Livestream Mode

<html>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/pZ_EeecttPA?si=vgSGN1IYxNAWf55i" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</html>

|Categories =
[[Category:S1 Pro+]]
[[Category:Sub]]
[[Category:Connections]]
}}

{{S1 Pro+ with Sub1 or Sub2}}

[[File:S1 Pro+ SubEQ settings.jpg]]

----
[[Category:S1 Pro+]]
[[Category:Sub]]

ToneMatch®

2026-10-04T13:20:12Z

ST:

[[Image:ToneMatchLogo.png|right|ToneMatch® Logo]]
{{Bose Moderated}}
__TOC__

==What is the concept behind {{tm}} presets, and what are the benefits?==

ToneMatch® is a proprietary new technology from Bose that for the first time makes it possible for live musicians anywhere, anytime, to play with recording-studio tonal quality.

==The Problem==

Most musicians, performers, and entertainers go to enormous lengths to develop their own, unique sound, or tone.

But one of the biggest sources of frustration in finding and then keeping good tone comes from the need to use an instrument pickup or microphone, and a loudspeaker.

The problem is that they all sound different.

They all color the sound of the voice or instrument that’s being amplified.

When musicians hear this coloration, they have a choice: live with the tonal coloration, try to fix it, either themselves or probably better by trying to work with a good sound engineer, or try another microphone or pickup.

Exactly the same thing is true of loudspeakers.

They all sound different.

Again, when musicians hear these tonal changes, they can either live with them, try to fix them, or they can look for another loudspeaker that they like better.

Bose concluded that most musicians are either playing with undesirable tonal coloration from microphones, pickups, and speakers, or are spending a lot of their time and effort trying to fix it.

==Using a Gifted Studio Engineer==

Now, one way you could get rid of the tonal coloration would be to give each musician a good sound engineer, who could listen to the tonal changes and take the time necessary to make adjustments on the sophisticated equipment needed to do this kind of work.

With ToneMatch technology that work has already been done.

==Building the Studio Engineer into the Equipment==

Bose has been working with many musicians and have listened to a wide variety of instruments, microphones and pickups connected to the L1 system, and for each, has taken the time necessary to make the adjustments to the sophisticated equipment necessary to optimize the tone.

Then, they stored the settings inside the T1, ready to be recalled at the touch of a button by any musician, anywhere in the world.

==ToneMatch Partners==

In order to provide the largest library of ToneMatch® presets, Bose has been working with a growing number of manufacturers to develop these studio-quality settings for their microphones and instruments.

You can watch video interviews with people from those manufacturers talking about ToneMatch technology.

[[ToneMatch%C2%AE Interviews]]

==How the Loudspeaker Affects ToneMatch Performance==

It should be stressed that the loudspeaker plays a crucial role in delivering this kind of tonal improvement.

The L1 system is unique because it delivers the improvement consistently across the stage and throughout the audience in a way no conventional speaker can.

== ToneMatch Switch on L1 Pro and S1 Pro+ ==
{{ToneMatch Switch}}

==How ToneMatch Works Together with zEQ==
You might not want to change anything once you hear the improvement provided by a ToneMatch® preset.

But if you do, there’s another key new technology built into the {{ToneMatch Mixer}} for doing just that.

It’s called [[T1_ToneMatch%C2%AE_Audio_Engine_/_zEQ|zEQ]].

First, you select you ToneMatch preset.

Then, you turn the rotary selector on the {{ToneMatch Mixer}} to zEQ.

At this point, three controls on the {{ToneMatch Mixer}} are automatically programmed to provide tonal enhancements for your voice or instrument.

If you’ve selected a preset for bass guitar, for example, the three controls are programmed to allow tonal enhancements for that particular instrument. If you choose a vocal mic, the controls are programmed for vocals, and so on.

It is the combination of the new tone-shaping technologies in the {{ToneMatch Mixer}} engine, married to the exceptional coverage and high degree of portability in the L1 system, that compels Bose to say that this is the most advanced system they’ve ever offered to musicians.

== Related Resources ==
* [[A Personal Take on ToneMatch® Technology]] - presentation from Ken-at-Bose (video)
* [[Presets / ToneMatch® / Downloads|ToneMatch® Presets for the T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine]]
* [[ToneMatch® Interviews|What others are saying about ToneMatch®]] Interviews with ToneMatch® Partners
* [[T1_ToneMatch%C2%AE_Audio_Engine_/_zEQ|zEQ]]
* [[Presets]]
* [[T1_ToneMatch%C2%AE_Audio_Engine_/_Bypass#What_Happens_When_You_Bypass_a_Preset.3F|What happens when you bypass a ToneMatch® Preset?]]
<noinclude>

Note: There is a recent video of Ken Jacob describing ToneMatch®. Until it is available here is a shorter version from the days before we called Presets, ToneMatch® Presets.
</noinclude>
<html>
<script type="text/javascript" src="/thickbox/jquery-compressed.js"></script>
<script type="text/javascript" src="/thickbox/thickbox.js"></script>
<link rel="stylesheet" href="/thickbox/thickbox.css" type="text/css" media="screen" />
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/flash/training01.htm?TB_iframe=true&width=270&height=185" title="Presets - Ken Jacob" class="thickbox">Presets - Ken Jacob</a>
</html>
* [[:Category:ToneMatch|More ToneMatch® articles]]
<noinclude>
----
[[Category:ToneMatch]]
[[Category:Video]]

</noinclude>

MediaWiki:Common.css

2026-10-04T02:11:59Z

ST:

/** CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */

/* -------------------------
Fonts
------------------------- */
@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-Black";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-Black.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-BlackItalic";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-BlackItalic.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-Bold";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-Bold.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-BoldItalic";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-BoldItalic.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-Book";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-Book.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-BookItalic";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-BookItalic.otf") format("opentype");
}

/* Base typography */
body {
font-family: "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
max-width: 1366px;
}

h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {
font-family: "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
/* text-transform: uppercase; */
}

.mw-body h1,
.mw-body h2,
.mw-body h3,
.mw-body h4,
.mw-body h5 {
font-family: "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
}

/* Headline box */
.mw-headline {
font-family: "Gotham-Bold", "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
background: #ffffff;
/* previous alternatives:
background: #cef2e0;
background-color: #CCFFCC;
border-radius: 5px;
border: 1px outset #008080;
*/
padding: 2px;
width: 300px;
}

/* Hide structured data block if present */
.structuredData {
display: none;
}

/* Table cell vertical alignment */
td {
vertical-align: top;
}

/* ****************** NO TITLE ON MAINPAGE *************** */
/* Adjust page name(s) to match your actual main page slug(s) */
/*
.page-Bose_Portable_PA_Knowledge.action-view h1.firstHeading,
.page-Bose_Portable_PA_Knowledge.action-submit h1.firstHeading {
display: none;
}
*/
/* Responsive images */
img {
max-width: 100%;
height: auto;
-webkit-touch-callout: none;
-webkit-user-select: none;
-khtml-user-select: none;
-moz-user-select: none;
-ms-user-select: none;
user-select: none;
}

/* DivToc: responsive table of contents with introduction */
.tocdiv {
max-width: 1366px;
display: grid;
grid-gap: 15px;
column-gap: 30px;
grid-template-columns: repeat(auto-fit, minmax(300px, 1fr));
grid-template-rows: auto;
}

/* Mobile fix for DivToc layout */
@media screen and (max-width: 700px) {
.tocdiv {
display: block !important;
}
.tocdiv > div {
width: 100% !important;
margin: 0 !important;
}
}

/* Responsive iframe for YouTube videos */
@media screen and (max-width: 750px) {
iframe {
max-width: 100% !important;
width: auto !important;
height: auto !important;
}
}

/* Power Characters */
@font-face {
font-family: 'power_symbols';
src: url('/fonts/unicode/Unicode_IEC_symbol.woff2') format('woff2'),
url('/fonts/unicode/Unicode_IEC_symbol.woff') format('woff'),
url('/fonts/unicode/Unicode_IEC_symbol.ttf') format('truetype');
font-weight: normal;
font-style: normal;
}

.power {
font-family: 'power_symbols';
font-style: normal;
}

/* ---------- Link colors (LVHA order) ---------- */
.mw-body-content a:link { color: #0645AD; }
.mw-body-content a:visited { color: #551A8B; }
.mw-body-content a:hover { color: #0B0080; text-decoration: underline; }
.mw-body-content a:active { color: #C00000; }

/* Special link types */
.mw-body-content a.new { color: #CC0000; }
.mw-body-content a.external,
.mw-body-content a.extiw { color: #3366BB; }
.mw-body-content a.stub { color: #772233; }

/* === L1 comparison table scroll container === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap {
display: block;
overflow-x: auto;
overflow-y: visible;
width: 100%;
max-width: 100%;
-webkit-overflow-scrolling: touch;
background: #ffffff;
}

/* === CRITICAL OVERRIDE: defeat Vector/Minerva table width clamp === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare {
white-space: nowrap;
width: max-content;
min-width: 1400px;
max-width: none !important; /* ensure table can overflow horizontally */
border-collapse: separate;
border-spacing: 0;
}

/* === Sticky header row === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare th {
position: sticky;
top: 0;
background: #f8f9fa;
color: #202122;
z-index: 10;
}

/* === Sticky first column === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare th:first-child,
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare td:first-child {
position: sticky;
left: 0;
background: #ffffff;
z-index: 9;
border-right: 1px solid #a2a9b1;
}

/* === Image display on hover over text === */
.hover-image-wrapper {
position: relative;
display: inline-block;
cursor: help;
}

.hover-image-popup {
position: absolute;
top: 1.2em;
left: 0;
z-index: 9999;
background: #fff;
padding: 4px;
border: 1px solid #ccc;
visibility: hidden !important;
opacity: 0 !important;
pointer-events: none !important;
transition: opacity 0.15s ease-in-out;
}

.hover-image-wrapper:hover .hover-image-popup {
visibility: visible !important;
opacity: 1 !important;
pointer-events: auto !important;
}

/* Hide page action tabs for anonymous visitors only (they have a #pt-login link) */
body:has(#pt-login) #p-views,
body:has(#pt-login) #p-associated-pages,
body:has(#pt-login) #p-variants,
body:has(#pt-login) #p-cactions,
body:has(#pt-login) .vector-page-tools,
body:has(#pt-login) .vector-menu-tabs,
body:has(#pt-login) .minerva-page-actions,
body:has(#pt-login) .page-actions-menu {
display: none !important;
}

/* Belt and braces: never hide search */
#p-search {
display: block !important;
}

/* Ensure TOC is visible unless explicitly hidden elsewhere */
#toc, .toc {
display: block !important;
}
@media (max-width: 768px) {
.vector-sidebar, .mw-sidebar {
transform: translateX(-100%);
transition: transform .25s ease;
position: fixed;
left: 0;
top: 0;
height: 100%;
z-index: 9999;
background: var(--bg-color, #fff);
box-shadow: 0 0 12px rgba(0,0,0,.2);
}
.vector-sidebar.open {
transform: translateX(0);
}
/* Add space for a toggle button */
.vector-main-content { padding-left: 0 !important; }
.sidebar-toggle {
position: fixed;
left: 8px;
top: 8px;
z-index: 10001;
background: #fff;
border-radius: 4px;
padding: 6px;
box-shadow: 0 1px 4px rgba(0,0,0,.2);
}
}

MediaWiki:Common.css

2026-10-04T01:27:07Z

ST:

/** CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */

/* -------------------------
Fonts
------------------------- */
@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-Black";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-Black.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-BlackItalic";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-BlackItalic.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-Bold";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-Bold.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-BoldItalic";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-BoldItalic.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-Book";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-Book.otf") format("opentype");
}

@font-face {
font-family: "Gotham-BookItalic";
src: url("/styles/Gotham-BookItalic.otf") format("opentype");
}

/* Base typography */
body {
font-family: "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
max-width: 1366px;
}

h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {
font-family: "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
/* text-transform: uppercase; */
}

.mw-body h1,
.mw-body h2,
.mw-body h3,
.mw-body h4,
.mw-body h5 {
font-family: "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
}

/* Headline box */
.mw-headline {
font-family: "Gotham-Bold", "Gotham-Book", Montserrat, sans-serif;
background: #ffffff;
/* previous alternatives:
background: #cef2e0;
background-color: #CCFFCC;
border-radius: 5px;
border: 1px outset #008080;
*/
padding: 2px;
width: 300px;
}

/* Hide structured data block if present */
.structuredData {
display: none;
}

/* Table cell vertical alignment */
td {
vertical-align: top;
}

/* ****************** NO TITLE ON MAINPAGE *************** */
/* Adjust page name(s) to match your actual main page slug(s) */
/*
.page-Bose_Portable_PA_Knowledge.action-view h1.firstHeading,
.page-Bose_Portable_PA_Knowledge.action-submit h1.firstHeading {
display: none;
}
*/
/* Responsive images */
img {
max-width: 100%;
height: auto;
-webkit-touch-callout: none;
-webkit-user-select: none;
-khtml-user-select: none;
-moz-user-select: none;
-ms-user-select: none;
user-select: none;
}

/* DivToc: responsive table of contents with introduction */
.tocdiv {
max-width: 1366px;
display: grid;
grid-gap: 15px;
column-gap: 30px;
grid-template-columns: repeat(auto-fit, minmax(300px, 1fr));
grid-template-rows: auto;
}

/* Mobile fix for DivToc layout */
@media screen and (max-width: 700px) {
.tocdiv {
display: block !important;
}
.tocdiv > div {
width: 100% !important;
margin: 0 !important;
}
}

/* Responsive iframe for YouTube videos */
@media screen and (max-width: 750px) {
iframe {
max-width: 100% !important;
width: auto !important;
height: auto !important;
}
}

/* Power Characters */
@font-face {
font-family: 'power_symbols';
src: url('/fonts/unicode/Unicode_IEC_symbol.woff2') format('woff2'),
url('/fonts/unicode/Unicode_IEC_symbol.woff') format('woff'),
url('/fonts/unicode/Unicode_IEC_symbol.ttf') format('truetype');
font-weight: normal;
font-style: normal;
}

.power {
font-family: 'power_symbols';
font-style: normal;
}

/* ---------- Link colors (LVHA order) ---------- */
.mw-body-content a:link { color: #0645AD; }
.mw-body-content a:visited { color: #551A8B; }
.mw-body-content a:hover { color: #0B0080; text-decoration: underline; }
.mw-body-content a:active { color: #C00000; }

/* Special link types */
.mw-body-content a.new { color: #CC0000; }
.mw-body-content a.external,
.mw-body-content a.extiw { color: #3366BB; }
.mw-body-content a.stub { color: #772233; }

/* === L1 comparison table scroll container === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap {
display: block;
overflow-x: auto;
overflow-y: visible;
width: 100%;
max-width: 100%;
-webkit-overflow-scrolling: touch;
background: #ffffff;
}

/* === CRITICAL OVERRIDE: defeat Vector/Minerva table width clamp === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare {
white-space: nowrap;
width: max-content;
min-width: 1400px;
max-width: none !important; /* ensure table can overflow horizontally */
border-collapse: separate;
border-spacing: 0;
}

/* === Sticky header row === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare th {
position: sticky;
top: 0;
background: #f8f9fa;
color: #202122;
z-index: 10;
}

/* === Sticky first column === */
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare th:first-child,
.mw-parser-output .l1-compare-wrap table.l1-compare td:first-child {
position: sticky;
left: 0;
background: #ffffff;
z-index: 9;
border-right: 1px solid #a2a9b1;
}

/* === Image display on hover over text === */
.hover-image-wrapper {
position: relative;
display: inline-block;
cursor: help;
}

.hover-image-popup {
position: absolute;
top: 1.2em;
left: 0;
z-index: 9999;
background: #fff;
padding: 4px;
border: 1px solid #ccc;
visibility: hidden !important;
opacity: 0 !important;
pointer-events: none !important;
transition: opacity 0.15s ease-in-out;
}

.hover-image-wrapper:hover .hover-image-popup {
visibility: visible !important;
opacity: 1 !important;
pointer-events: auto !important;
}

/* Hide page action tabs for users who are NOT logged in,
but keep the search box (#p-search lives inside #right-navigation) */
body:not(.mw-user) #p-views,
body:not(.mw-user) #p-associated-pages,
body:not(.mw-user) #p-variants,
body:not(.mw-user) #p-cactions,
body:not(.mw-user) .vector-page-tools,
body:not(.mw-user) .vector-menu-tabs,
body:not(.mw-user) .minerva-page-actions,
body:not(.mw-user) .page-actions-menu {
display: none !important;
}

/* Belt and braces: never hide search */
#p-search {
display: block !important;
}

/* Ensure TOC is visible unless explicitly hidden elsewhere */
#toc, .toc {
display: block !important;
}
@media (max-width: 768px) {
.vector-sidebar, .mw-sidebar {
transform: translateX(-100%);
transition: transform .25s ease;
position: fixed;
left: 0;
top: 0;
height: 100%;
z-index: 9999;
background: var(--bg-color, #fff);
box-shadow: 0 0 12px rgba(0,0,0,.2);
}
.vector-sidebar.open {
transform: translateX(0);
}
/* Add space for a toggle button */
.vector-main-content { padding-left: 0 !important; }
.sidebar-toggle {
position: fixed;
left: 8px;
top: 8px;
z-index: 10001;
background: #fff;
border-radius: 4px;
padding: 6px;
box-shadow: 0 1px 4px rgba(0,0,0,.2);
}
}

Bose Portable PA Knowledge

2026-09-25T06:25:15Z

ST:

__NOTOC__
Welcome to Bose Portable PA Knowledge — concise guides, specifications, and troubleshooting for Bose Portable PA systems.

== Start Here ==
If you're new to Bose Portable PA systems, these pages will help you get oriented quickly.
{{Callout|type=protip|title=Seat the columns firmly|text=Make sure the column sections are fully seated when assembling your system. The lower section must seat firmly into the power stand. The top section must seat firmly into the lower section. Then confirm that sound is coming from the column as well as the power stand or Sub. If the sound is muffled or missing highs, reseat the column sections.}}
* [[The L1® Approach and the History Of Amplification|The L1 Approach]] to sound amplification - Why L1 systems are different.
* [[Performing with the L1 Pro]] - This is different. We have hints for you from the people who designed the L1.
* [[Connecting Gear]] — How to connect microphones, instruments, mixers, and external devices.
* [[Gain Staging]] — How to set levels correctly to avoid distortion and noise.
* [[Feedback]] — Why feedback happens and how to prevent it.
* [[ToneMatch]] — What ToneMatch presets do and how to choose the right one.
* [[Different_Models|Identify your L1]] — How to identify your L1 model (current and legacy).

----

== Current Products ==

=== [[L1 Pro|L1 Pro Family]] ===
{{L1 Pro icon}}
The complete L1 Pro line: L1 Pro8, L1 Pro16, L1 Pro32, plus {{Sub icon}} Sub1 and Sub2.

=== [[T4S/T8S ToneMatch® Mixer|ToneMatch Mixers]] ===
{{T4S icon}}{{T8S icon}}
T4S, T8S, ToneMatch Mixers.

=== [[S1 Pro+]] ===
{{S1 Pro+ icon}}
Portable, battery‑powered PA system.

=== [[F1 Model 812 Flexible Array Loudspeaker]] ===
{{F1 icon}}
F1 Model 812 and F1 Subwoofer.

----

== Common Problems ==

=== [[Feedback]] ===
Why it happens, how to prevent it, and the fastest ways to fix it.

=== [[Gain Staging]] ===
How to set levels correctly to avoid distortion, clipping, and noise.

=== [[ToneMatch|ToneMatch Presets]] ===
What presets do, how they shape your sound, and how to choose the right one.

=== [[Connecting Gear]] ===
Principles for connecting mixers, instruments, microphones, and external devices.

----

== [[Legacy Products]] ==
Discontinued Bose Portable PA systems, product information, documentation, troubleshooting, technical data.
→ [[Legacy Products]]

----

== History ==
The story of Bose Portable PA systems and the community that grew around them.
→ [[History of Bose_Portable PA]]

----
<references />

<span></span>

[[Category:Site]]

Bose Portable PA Knowledge

2026-09-22T16:34:31Z

ST:

__NOTOC__
Welcome to Bose Portable PA Knowledge — concise guides, specifications, and troubleshooting for Bose Portable PA systems.

== Start Here ==
If you're new to Bose Portable PA systems, these pages will help you get oriented quickly. Bur first - an important tip.
{{Callout|type=protip|title=Seat the columns firmly|text=Make sure the column sections are fully seated when assembling your system. The lower section must seat firmly into the power stand. The top section must seat firmly into the lower section. Then confirm that sound is coming from the column as well as the power stand or Sub. If the sound is muffled or missing highs, reseat the column sections.}}
* [[The L1® Approach and the History Of Amplification|The L1 Approach]] to sound amplification - Why L1 systems are different.
* [[Performing with the L1 Pro]] - This is different. We have hints for you from the people who designed the L1.
* [[Connecting Gear]] — How to connect microphones, instruments, mixers, and external devices.
* [[Gain Staging]] — How to set levels correctly to avoid distortion and noise.
* [[Feedback]] — Why feedback happens and how to prevent it.
* [[ToneMatch]] — What ToneMatch presets do and how to choose the right one.
* [[Different_Models|Identify your L1]] — How to identify your L1 model (current and legacy).

----

== Current Products ==

=== [[L1 Pro|L1 Pro Family]] ===
{{L1 Pro icon}}
The complete L1 Pro line: L1 Pro8, L1 Pro16, L1 Pro32, plus {{Sub icon}} Sub1 and Sub2.

=== [[T4S/T8S ToneMatch® Mixer|ToneMatch Mixers]] ===
{{T4S icon}}{{T8S icon}}
T4S, T8S, ToneMatch Mixers.

=== [[S1 Pro+]] ===
{{S1 Pro+ icon}}
Portable, battery‑powered PA system.

=== [[F1 Model 812 Flexible Array Loudspeaker]] ===
{{F1 icon}}
F1 Model 812 and F1 Subwoofer.

----

== Common Problems ==

=== [[Feedback]] ===
Why it happens, how to prevent it, and the fastest ways to fix it.

=== [[Gain Staging]] ===
How to set levels correctly to avoid distortion, clipping, and noise.

=== [[ToneMatch|ToneMatch Presets]] ===
What presets do, how they shape your sound, and how to choose the right one.

=== [[Connecting Gear]] ===
Principles for connecting mixers, instruments, microphones, and external devices.

----

== [[Legacy Products]] ==
Discontinued Bose Portable PA systems, product information, documentation, troubleshooting, technical data.
→ [[Legacy Products]]

----

== History ==
The story of Bose Portable PA systems and the community that grew around them.
→ [[History of Bose_Portable PA]]

----
<references />

<span></span>

[[Category:Site]]

Should I get an L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16

2026-09-09T16:43:02Z

ST:

{{DivToc

|RightHead = Should I get an L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16?

|RightBody =
If you are considering the '''L1 Pro8''' and '''L1 Pro16''' and trying to understand '''which is a better choice for you''', then keep reading. I'll tell you what I considered as I pondered this question.

[[File:L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16 700x300.jpg|400px|L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16|right]]

|Categories =

[[Category:How To]]
[[Category:Product to which this applies]]
[[Category:Other]]
}}

<div style="max-width:1366px;">

<div>

</div>

===Should I get an L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16? ===
If you are considering the '''L1 Pro8''' and '''L1 Pro16''' and trying to understand '''which is a better choice for you''', then keep reading. I'll tell you what I considered as I pondered this question.

<html>
<details><summary>Too long didn't read - 🎬 Spoiler Alert</summary>
I got both the L1 Pro8 and two L1 Pro16. In the rest of this article, I will discuss the merits of both and why you might want one or the other. For a detailed comparison of the specifications please see 👉</html>[[{{PAGENAME}}#Comparison_Table|the table at the bottom of the article]]<HTML>.
</details>
</html>

=== Background ===
I've enjoyed both the {{Compact}} and the {{Model 1S}} for over a decade. I mention these legacy models because they are the predecessors to the L1 Pro8 and L1 Pro16. This is how I used them and why I was interested in the new systems. Getting either of these new systems would mean replacing the older ones.

==== {{Compact}} ====
I got the {{Compact}} in 2009. At times I had three. One of them lived in the trunk of my four-door sedan. It was small and light, and I used it several times a week for small gigs indoors and outside. I used it as a monitor when playing on stages where there was a house system. It served as backup to my other gear. Although I never had to use it to replace another piece of L1 equipment, I have bailed out other people with it when their gear went down.

The {{Compact}} worked well for up to fifty people when the background noise was light. The single 8-inch woofer goes down to 65 Hz, and this is fine for vocals and guitar. It was also good for pre-recorded music for backing tracks or background music. I have run electric bass through it in small venues.

==== {{Model 1S}} ====

I got the {{Model 1S}} with B2 bass module in 2012. I already had the {{Model II}} with two B1 bass modules, so it might have been redundant to get the {{Model 1S}}. The reasons:
* The {{Model 1S}} vertical dispersion is 10° (+/- 5°). The {{Model II}} had 0-degree vertical projection. This meant the {{Model 1S}} could be useful when the audience was slightly above or below the stage. Click the picture for more information.
* The [[B2]] could be as loud as four B1s without requiring an extra amplifier.

More detail [[L1 Model 1S Compared to L1 Model II Vertical Dispersion]]

=== The New L1 Pro8 and L1 Pro16 ===
==== Similarities ====
Both the L1 Pro8 and L1 Pro16 have three channels (two with ToneMatch Presets, Tone controls, and Reverb). The third channel can receive Bluetooth audio or line-level inputs. Both units can be controlled using the Bose Music App, and you can connect a ToneMatch mixer to the ToneMatch port.

==== L1 Pro8 ====
If all my gigs were acoustic-oriented, singer/songwriter events performing for attentive audiences, the L1 Pro8 would be great. The 31-pound power stand is only six pounds more than the {{Compact}}. Add the Cylindrical Radiator and extension, and the total system weight is 40 pounds. The footprint is only slightly bigger than the {{Compact}}. For larger venues, I can use the L1 Pro8 on stage and run a line out to the house PA (if there is one).

==== L1 Pro16 ====
At a glance, you might not notice the difference between the L1 Pro8 and the L1 Pro16. The L1 Pro8 power stand houses the 7x13" racetrack driver. The 41.4-pound L1 Pro16 power stand has the 10x18" racetrack driver. The power stand is taller, but you might have to put the units side-by-side to notice. The footprint of the L1 Pro16 is only an inch wider than the L1 Pro8.

The L1 Pro16 line array is twice as long as the L1 Pro8. It is driven by a larger amplifier and provides higher volume and lower drop-off over distance.

The L1 Pro16 power stand supplies four times the power to the larger racetrack driver.

The L1 Pro16 downward coverage makes it the best when some or all of the audience is below the stage.

=== Bottom Line ===
If you have an L1 Pro16, there's no need to get an L1 Pro8 unless you need:
*The ultra-portability of the L1 Pro8 (40 pounds vs. 56)
*The greater vertical coverage (above the stage). See the chart below.

I got both models because I need the unique benefits of the L1 Pro8 for some situations and the power and bass response of the L1 Pro16 for others.

=== Two L1 Pro8 systems or One L1 Pro16 ===
{{Two L1 Pro8 or One L1 Pro16}}

===Comparison Table ===
{{:Bose L1 Pro8 Compared to L1 Pro16}}
</div>
=== Documentation ===
{{L1 Pro Documentation}}

<div style="float:right;max-width:50%">
{{Editorial ST
|Author = [[User:ST|ST]]
|discussion page = to [https://twitter.com/st_muso Twitter @ST_Muso] or [https://www.linkedin.com/in/stpro/ LinkedIn @STPro]

}}</div>
----
[[Category:L1 Pro]]
[[Category:Compact]]
[[Category:Model 1S]]
[[Category:Comparison]]

Should I get an L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16

2026-09-09T07:42:34Z

ST: L1_Pro8_or_L1_Pro16_700x300.jpg

{{DivToc

|RightHead = Should I get an L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16?

|RightBody =
If you are considering the '''L1 Pro8''' and '''L1 Pro16''' and trying to understand '''which is a better choice for you''', then keep reading. I'll tell you what I considered as I pondered this question.

[[File:L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16 700x300.jpg|400px|L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16|right]]

|Categories =

[[Category:How To]]
[[Category:Product to which this applies]]
[[Category:Other]]
}}

<div style="max-width:1366px;">

<div>

</div>
{{#pageprops: ogimage = File:L1_Pro8_or_L1_Pro16_700x300.jpg }}

===Should I get an L1 Pro8 or L1 Pro16? ===
If you are considering the '''L1 Pro8''' and '''L1 Pro16''' and trying to understand '''which is a better choice for you''', then keep reading. I'll tell you what I considered as I pondered this question.

<html>
<details><summary>Too long didn't read - 🎬 Spoiler Alert</summary>
I got both the L1 Pro8 and two L1 Pro16. In the rest of this article, I will discuss the merits of both and why you might want one or the other. For a detailed comparison of the specifications please see 👉</html>[[{{PAGENAME}}#Comparison_Table|the table at the bottom of the article]]<HTML>.
</details>
</html>

=== Background ===
I've enjoyed both the {{Compact}} and the {{Model 1S}} for over a decade. I mention these legacy models because they are the predecessors to the L1 Pro8 and L1 Pro16. This is how I used them and why I was interested in the new systems. Getting either of these new systems would mean replacing the older ones.

==== {{Compact}} ====
I got the {{Compact}} in 2009. At times I had three. One of them lived in the trunk of my four-door sedan. It was small and light, and I used it several times a week for small gigs indoors and outside. I used it as a monitor when playing on stages where there was a house system. It served as backup to my other gear. Although I never had to use it to replace another piece of L1 equipment, I have bailed out other people with it when their gear went down.

The {{Compact}} worked well for up to fifty people when the background noise was light. The single 8-inch woofer goes down to 65 Hz, and this is fine for vocals and guitar. It was also good for pre-recorded music for backing tracks or background music. I have run electric bass through it in small venues.

==== {{Model 1S}} ====

I got the {{Model 1S}} with B2 bass module in 2012. I already had the {{Model II}} with two B1 bass modules, so it might have been redundant to get the {{Model 1S}}. The reasons:
* The {{Model 1S}} vertical dispersion is 10° (+/- 5°). The {{Model II}} had 0-degree vertical projection. This meant the {{Model 1S}} could be useful when the audience was slightly above or below the stage. Click the picture for more information.
* The [[B2]] could be as loud as four B1s without requiring an extra amplifier.

More detail [[L1 Model 1S Compared to L1 Model II Vertical Dispersion]]

=== The New L1 Pro8 and L1 Pro16 ===
==== Similarities ====
Both the L1 Pro8 and L1 Pro16 have three channels (two with ToneMatch Presets, Tone controls, and Reverb). The third channel can receive Bluetooth audio or line-level inputs. Both units can be controlled using the Bose Music App, and you can connect a ToneMatch mixer to the ToneMatch port.

==== L1 Pro8 ====
If all my gigs were acoustic-oriented, singer/songwriter events performing for attentive audiences, the L1 Pro8 would be great. The 31-pound power stand is only six pounds more than the {{Compact}}. Add the Cylindrical Radiator and extension, and the total system weight is 40 pounds. The footprint is only slightly bigger than the {{Compact}}. For larger venues, I can use the L1 Pro8 on stage and run a line out to the house PA (if there is one).

==== L1 Pro16 ====
At a glance, you might not notice the difference between the L1 Pro8 and the L1 Pro16. The L1 Pro8 power stand houses the 7x13" racetrack driver. The 41.4-pound L1 Pro16 power stand has the 10x18" racetrack driver. The power stand is taller, but you might have to put the units side-by-side to notice. The footprint of the L1 Pro16 is only an inch wider than the L1 Pro8.

The L1 Pro16 line array is twice as long as the L1 Pro8. It is driven by a larger amplifier and provides higher volume and lower drop-off over distance.

The L1 Pro16 power stand supplies four times the power to the larger racetrack driver.

The L1 Pro16 downward coverage makes it the best when some or all of the audience is below the stage.

=== Bottom Line ===
If you have an L1 Pro16, there's no need to get an L1 Pro8 unless you need:
*The ultra-portability of the L1 Pro8 (40 pounds vs. 56)
*The greater vertical coverage (above the stage). See the chart below.

I got both models because I need the unique benefits of the L1 Pro8 for some situations and the power and bass response of the L1 Pro16 for others.

=== Two L1 Pro8 systems or One L1 Pro16 ===
{{Two L1 Pro8 or One L1 Pro16}}

===Comparison Table ===
{{:Bose L1 Pro8 Compared to L1 Pro16}}
</div>
=== Documentation ===
{{L1 Pro Documentation}}

<div style="float:right;max-width:50%">
{{Editorial ST
|Author = [[User:ST|ST]]
|discussion page = to [https://twitter.com/st_muso Twitter @ST_Muso] or [https://www.linkedin.com/in/stpro/ LinkedIn @STPro]

}}</div>
----
[[Category:L1 Pro]]
[[Category:Compact]]
[[Category:Model 1S]]
[[Category:Comparison]]

Template:MacOS Issues

2026-09-07T01:32:49Z

ST:

====[Filename] can't be opened because the identity of the developer cannot be confirmed====
If you see "[Filename] can't be opened because the identity of the developer cannot be confirmed" message displayed

Mac OSX users may see this message when trying to install a Bose app. If this message appears, try the following:

Mac users may need to hold the Control key (Ctrl) when opening the file.

Various versions of the Mac OS cannot identify Bose as a developer. The Mountain Lion version of OS X (10.8) includes a feature called Gatekeeper to protect users from installing applications of non-Apple identified developers. The Mavericks version of OS X (10.9.5) temporarily cannot identify Bose as a developer as well.

To open the application, follow these steps:
== How to open the app anyway ==

# Open '''System Settings'''.
# Go to '''Privacy & Security'''.
# Scroll all the way down.
# You will see a message saying:
: ''"ToneMatch Updater.app was blocked from use because it is not from an identified developer."''
# Click '''Allow Anyway'''.
# Open the app again — macOS will now show a different dialog with an '''Open''' button.
# Click '''Open'''.

This bypasses Gatekeeper only for this one app, not globally.

More information on Gatekeeper can be found at http://support.apple.com/kb/HT5290

----
[[Category:T1]]
[[Category:T4S]]
[[Category:T8S]]
[[Category:Firmware]]

Template:ToneMatch Updater MAC

2026-09-07T01:22:49Z

ST:

[[Media:ToneMatch_Updater_-_MAC.zip|'''MAC''' ToneMatch<sup>®</sup> Updater Software application for MAC]] (Supports OSX 10.7 through 10.15.x)

Template:ToneMatch Updater PC

2026-09-07T01:20:00Z

ST:

[[Media:ToneMatch_Updater_-_Windows.zip|'''PC''' ToneMatch<sup>®</sup> Updater Software application for PC]]

L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates

2026-09-07T01:12:45Z

ST:

<html>
<style>
td
{
vertical-align:top;
}
</style>
</html>
<noinclude>
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[Image:Download.jpg|right]]
<table style="cellpadding:15px"><tr>

<td valign="top" >

== Do I need to update? ==
Note: You do NOT need to update the firmware to the {{Model II nl}} unless
# you are using a B2 bass module AND
# the Bass Level switch on the back on the B2 does not change the sound of the system

== Firmware Prerequisites ==
{{Model II Firmware Without T1}}
{{:Firmware Prerequisites}}

How to tell if your Model II supports the [[B2|B2 Bass Module]]

* [[Model II / Versions from Serial Number]]
* [[Model II / Versions from T1®]]

</td><td>
{{:Firmware Update Warning}}
</td>
</tr></table>
{{Bose Reviewed}}
</noinclude>

<br>

== Version 1.4 ==
{| cellpadding="3" border="1"
|-
| Download
| [[Media:bose_L1M2_firmware_eq_update_version_1.4.zip|bose_L1M2_firmware_eq_update_version_1.4.zip]]



<div style="color:orange;font-size:medium;font-weight:bold">Please note: Updated version numbers will not be displayed until you restart your Model II Power Stand</div>.

|-
| Date
| 2012/09/27
|-
| Recommended for
| All {{Model II}} owners with the B2 bass module.
|-
| Replaces
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.3|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates Version 1.3]]
|-
| System Requirements:
|
{{L1 Updater}}

*PC
**Microsoft Windows 98 or higher
**USB 1.1 or higher
*Mac
**Mac OS X version 10.3 or higher
**USB 2.0

|-
| valign="top" | Related
|
[[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.8|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.8]] - Strongly Recommended if you don't already have 1.6.

*Note - this is '''{{T1}}''' firmware

|-
| Announcement
| Model II Power Stand Firmware version 1.4 makes the Model II Power Stand fully compatible with the B2 Bass Module's bass level control.
|-
|
===Changes===
|
* Firmware version 1.4 changes:
*# Supports the B2 bass module (recognition and operation with the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' ).
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

* System EQ 1.04 changes:
*# Support for the B2 bass module with different EQ for the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' .
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

|-
|
===Notes===
| Important: After step #3 below (firmware update) you need to restart your system to see the firmware version number update on the T1®. I have inserted instructions on how to do that into the screen shot below.
[[Image:Model II Firmware 1.4 Instructions.png]]

|-
|
===Error Messages===
| If you see this error message "The selected file contains the same version..."

http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/ga/ul/8030042556/inlineimg/Y/T1ModelIIFirmwareAndEQSameVersionWarning.png

click '''Yes'''

If you see a message "Selected file is not compatible. Please select a compatible file",

[[Image:L1 Updater Incompatible Error.png]]

you have chosen the wrong file.

; Firmware Update

[[Image:Model_II_Firmware_Update01.png]]

; System EQ Update

[[Image:Model_II_System EQ_Update01.png]]
|}

=== Changes ===
* Firmware version 1.4 changes:
*# Supports the B2 bass module (recognition and operation with the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' ).
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

* System EQ 1.04 changes:
*# Support for the B2 bass module with different EQ for the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' .
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

== Version 1.3 ==

{| cellpadding="3" border="1"
|-
| Download
| Superceded by [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version 1.4|Firmware Version 1.4]]

|-
| Date
| 2008/02/27
|-
| Recommended for
| All {{Model II}} owners
|-
| Replaces
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.1|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates Version 1.1]]
|-
| System Requirements:
|
{{L1 Updater}}

*PC
**Microsoft Windows 98 or higher
**USB 1.1 or higher
*Mac
**Mac OS X version 10.3 or higher
**USB 2.0

|-
| valign="top" | Related
|
[[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.7|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.7]] - Strongly Recommended if you don't already have 1.6.

*Note - this is '''{{T1}}''' firmware

|-
| Announcement
| [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/8221072574/m/3051006525 New L1® Model II Power Stand v1.3 Release]
|}

=== Installation Note ===

While you are installing the firmware update you will see a progress indicator on your computer screen in the {{L1 Updater}} application. You will not see any sign that anything is happening on the screen of the {{T1}}.

After the update completes, you will not see the new firmware number on the screen of the {{T1}}. You will need to turn off the Power on the Power Stand and then turn it back on for the update to be recognized. You may have to restart the L1® Updater software too.

[[Image:Model ll Power Stand Firmware13.gif|thumb|Model ll Power Stand Firmware1.3 post installation]]<br>

Note: You should restart your computer after applying the firmware update before attempting any further updates to your T1.

=== Fixes ===

Version 1.3 fixes a rare issue with the power stand firmware update process. On earlier versions the power stand could be affected by two failed 'L1 model II Firmware' updates in a row.

We recommend upgrading from 'L1 model II Firmware' version 1.0 or 1.1

=== Related ===

It is highly recommended that you also download and apply [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.8|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.8]] if you don't already have 1.6.

== Version 1.1 ==

'''<big>This is not required if you install [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.3|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Version 1.3]] above</big>'''

<br> Download is no longer available because this version has been superseded by version 1.4


Date: 2007/08/10

Recommended for: All L1™ Model II Owners

Announcement: [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/8221072574/m/5791097384 New T1 and L1™ Firmware]

=== Fixes ===

==== System Hang / Blue Screen on T1™ ====

Fixes a bug where some power outages could cause the L1 model II to hang. This is related to the problems reported on the message board where some users have experienced a loss of audio sometimes accompanied by a blank blue T1 LCD screen.<ref>Message Board reports of [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/7521050644/m/3951024284 T1™ failures]</ref>

=== Enhancements ===

==== Fan Behavior ====

We've also made some changes to the fan behavior to make it less noticeable.

=== Related ===

It is highly recommended that you also download and apply [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.3|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.3]]

== Prior Versions ==

*Version 1.0 - Original as released from manufacturing (no download)

<br> <noinclude>
----
<references />
[[Category:Downloads]]
[[Category:Firmware Updates]]
[[Category:Model II]]
</noinclude>

L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates

2026-09-07T01:04:38Z

ST:

<html>
<style>
td
{
vertical-align:top;
}
</style>
</html>
<noinclude>
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[Image:Download.jpg|right]]
<table style="cellpadding:15px"><tr>

<td valign="top" >

== Do I need to update? ==
Note: You do NOT need to update the firmware to the {{Model II nl}} unless
# you are using a B2 bass module AND
# the Bass Level switch on the back on the B2 does not change the sound of the system

== Firmware Prerequisites ==
{{Model II Firmware Without T1}}
{{:Firmware Prerequisites}}

How to tell if your Model II supports the [[B2|B2 Bass Module]]

* [[Model II / Versions from Serial Number]]
* [[Model II / Versions from T1®]]

</td><td>
{{:Firmware Update Warning}}
</td>
</tr></table>
{{Bose Reviewed}}
</noinclude>

<br>

== Version 1.4 ==
{| cellpadding="3" border="1"
|-
| Download
| [[File:bose_L1M2_firmware_eq_update_version_1.4.zip|bose_L1M2_firmware_eq_update_version_1.4.zip]]



<div style="color:orange;font-size:medium;font-weight:bold">Please note: Updated version numbers will not be displayed until you restart your Model II Power Stand</div>.

|-
| Date
| 2012/09/27
|-
| Recommended for
| All {{Model II}} owners with the B2 bass module.
|-
| Replaces
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.3|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates Version 1.3]]
|-
| System Requirements:
|
{{L1 Updater}}

*PC
**Microsoft Windows 98 or higher
**USB 1.1 or higher
*Mac
**Mac OS X version 10.3 or higher
**USB 2.0

|-
| valign="top" | Related
|
[[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.8|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.8]] - Strongly Recommended if you don't already have 1.6.

*Note - this is '''{{T1}}''' firmware

|-
| Announcement
| Model II Power Stand Firmware version 1.4 makes the Model II Power Stand fully compatible with the B2 Bass Module's bass level control.
|-
|
===Changes===
|
* Firmware version 1.4 changes:
*# Supports the B2 bass module (recognition and operation with the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' ).
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

* System EQ 1.04 changes:
*# Support for the B2 bass module with different EQ for the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' .
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

|-
|
===Notes===
| Important: After step #3 below (firmware update) you need to restart your system to see the firmware version number update on the T1®. I have inserted instructions on how to do that into the screen shot below.
[[Image:Model II Firmware 1.4 Instructions.png]]

|-
|
===Error Messages===
| If you see this error message "The selected file contains the same version..."

http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/ga/ul/8030042556/inlineimg/Y/T1ModelIIFirmwareAndEQSameVersionWarning.png

click '''Yes'''

If you see a message "Selected file is not compatible. Please select a compatible file",

[[Image:L1 Updater Incompatible Error.png]]

you have chosen the wrong file.

; Firmware Update

[[Image:Model_II_Firmware_Update01.png]]

; System EQ Update

[[Image:Model_II_System EQ_Update01.png]]
|}

=== Changes ===
* Firmware version 1.4 changes:
*# Supports the B2 bass module (recognition and operation with the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' ).
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

* System EQ 1.04 changes:
*# Support for the B2 bass module with different EQ for the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' .
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

== Version 1.3 ==

{| cellpadding="3" border="1"
|-
| Download
| Superceded by [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version 1.4|Firmware Version 1.4]]

|-
| Date
| 2008/02/27
|-
| Recommended for
| All {{Model II}} owners
|-
| Replaces
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.1|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates Version 1.1]]
|-
| System Requirements:
|
{{L1 Updater}}

*PC
**Microsoft Windows 98 or higher
**USB 1.1 or higher
*Mac
**Mac OS X version 10.3 or higher
**USB 2.0

|-
| valign="top" | Related
|
[[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.7|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.7]] - Strongly Recommended if you don't already have 1.6.

*Note - this is '''{{T1}}''' firmware

|-
| Announcement
| [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/8221072574/m/3051006525 New L1® Model II Power Stand v1.3 Release]
|}

=== Installation Note ===

While you are installing the firmware update you will see a progress indicator on your computer screen in the {{L1 Updater}} application. You will not see any sign that anything is happening on the screen of the {{T1}}.

After the update completes, you will not see the new firmware number on the screen of the {{T1}}. You will need to turn off the Power on the Power Stand and then turn it back on for the update to be recognized. You may have to restart the L1® Updater software too.

[[Image:Model ll Power Stand Firmware13.gif|thumb|Model ll Power Stand Firmware1.3 post installation]]<br>

Note: You should restart your computer after applying the firmware update before attempting any further updates to your T1.

=== Fixes ===

Version 1.3 fixes a rare issue with the power stand firmware update process. On earlier versions the power stand could be affected by two failed 'L1 model II Firmware' updates in a row.

We recommend upgrading from 'L1 model II Firmware' version 1.0 or 1.1

=== Related ===

It is highly recommended that you also download and apply [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.8|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.8]] if you don't already have 1.6.

== Version 1.1 ==

'''<big>This is not required if you install [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.3|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Version 1.3]] above</big>'''

<br> Download is no longer available because this version has been superseded by version 1.4


Date: 2007/08/10

Recommended for: All L1™ Model II Owners

Announcement: [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/8221072574/m/5791097384 New T1 and L1™ Firmware]

=== Fixes ===

==== System Hang / Blue Screen on T1™ ====

Fixes a bug where some power outages could cause the L1 model II to hang. This is related to the problems reported on the message board where some users have experienced a loss of audio sometimes accompanied by a blank blue T1 LCD screen.<ref>Message Board reports of [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/7521050644/m/3951024284 T1™ failures]</ref>

=== Enhancements ===

==== Fan Behavior ====

We've also made some changes to the fan behavior to make it less noticeable.

=== Related ===

It is highly recommended that you also download and apply [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.3|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.3]]

== Prior Versions ==

*Version 1.0 - Original as released from manufacturing (no download)

<br> <noinclude>
----
<references />
[[Category:Downloads]]
[[Category:Firmware Updates]]
[[Category:Model II]]
</noinclude>

File:Bose L1M2 firmware eq update version 1.4.zip

2026-09-07T01:04:25Z

ST: /* Summary */

== Summary ==
----
[[:Category:Model II]]

File:Bose L1M2 firmware eq update version 1.4.zip

2026-09-07T01:03:43Z

ST: ---- Catgory:Model II

== Summary ==
----
[[Catgory:Model II]]

L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates

2026-09-07T01:00:38Z

ST:

<html>
<style>
td
{
vertical-align:top;
}
</style>
</html>
<noinclude>
__NOEDITSECTION__
[[Image:Download.jpg|right]]
<table style="cellpadding:15px"><tr>
<td valign="top" width="250">__TOC__</td>
<td valign="top" >

== Do I need to update? ==
Note: You do NOT need to update the firmware to the {{Model II nl}} unless
# you are using a B2 bass module AND
# the Bass Level switch on the back on the B2 does not change the sound of the system

== Firmware Prerequisites ==
{{Model II Firmware Without T1}}
{{:Firmware Prerequisites}}

How to tell if your Model II supports the [[B2|B2 Bass Module]]

* [[Model II / Versions from Serial Number]]
* [[Model II / Versions from T1®]]

</td><td>
{{:Firmware Update Warning}}
</td>
</tr></table>
{{Bose Reviewed}}
</noinclude>

<br>

== Version 1.4 ==
{| cellpadding="3" border="1"
|-
| Download
| [[File:bose_L1M2_firmware_eq_update_version_1.4.zip|bose_L1M2_firmware_eq_update_version_1.4.zip]]



<div style="color:orange;font-size:medium;font-weight:bold">Please note: Updated version numbers will not be displayed until you restart your Model II Power Stand</div>.

|-
| Date
| 2012/09/27
|-
| Recommended for
| All {{Model II}} owners with the B2 bass module.
|-
| Replaces
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.3|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates Version 1.3]]
|-
| System Requirements:
|
{{L1 Updater}}

*PC
**Microsoft Windows 98 or higher
**USB 1.1 or higher
*Mac
**Mac OS X version 10.3 or higher
**USB 2.0

|-
| valign="top" | Related
|
[[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.8|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.8]] - Strongly Recommended if you don't already have 1.6.

*Note - this is '''{{T1}}''' firmware

|-
| Announcement
| Model II Power Stand Firmware version 1.4 makes the Model II Power Stand fully compatible with the B2 Bass Module's bass level control.
|-
|
===Changes===
|
* Firmware version 1.4 changes:
*# Supports the B2 bass module (recognition and operation with the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' ).
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

* System EQ 1.04 changes:
*# Support for the B2 bass module with different EQ for the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' .
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

|-
|
===Notes===
| Important: After step #3 below (firmware update) you need to restart your system to see the firmware version number update on the T1®. I have inserted instructions on how to do that into the screen shot below.
[[Image:Model II Firmware 1.4 Instructions.png]]

|-
|
===Error Messages===
| If you see this error message "The selected file contains the same version..."

http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/ga/ul/8030042556/inlineimg/Y/T1ModelIIFirmwareAndEQSameVersionWarning.png

click '''Yes'''

If you see a message "Selected file is not compatible. Please select a compatible file",

[[Image:L1 Updater Incompatible Error.png]]

you have chosen the wrong file.

; Firmware Update

[[Image:Model_II_Firmware_Update01.png]]

; System EQ Update

[[Image:Model_II_System EQ_Update01.png]]
|}

=== Changes ===
* Firmware version 1.4 changes:
*# Supports the B2 bass module (recognition and operation with the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' ).
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

* System EQ 1.04 changes:
*# Support for the B2 bass module with different EQ for the B2 Bass Level Switch for positions '''+''' and '''-''' .
*# No change to the operation of the Cylindrical Radiator.
*# No change to the operation of the B1 bass module.

== Version 1.3 ==

{| cellpadding="3" border="1"
|-
| Download
| Superceded by [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version 1.4|Firmware Version 1.4]]

|-
| Date
| 2008/02/27
|-
| Recommended for
| All {{Model II}} owners
|-
| Replaces
| [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.1|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Updates Version 1.1]]
|-
| System Requirements:
|
{{L1 Updater}}

*PC
**Microsoft Windows 98 or higher
**USB 1.1 or higher
*Mac
**Mac OS X version 10.3 or higher
**USB 2.0

|-
| valign="top" | Related
|
[[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.7|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.7]] - Strongly Recommended if you don't already have 1.6.

*Note - this is '''{{T1}}''' firmware

|-
| Announcement
| [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/8221072574/m/3051006525 New L1® Model II Power Stand v1.3 Release]
|}

=== Installation Note ===

While you are installing the firmware update you will see a progress indicator on your computer screen in the {{L1 Updater}} application. You will not see any sign that anything is happening on the screen of the {{T1}}.

After the update completes, you will not see the new firmware number on the screen of the {{T1}}. You will need to turn off the Power on the Power Stand and then turn it back on for the update to be recognized. You may have to restart the L1® Updater software too.

[[Image:Model ll Power Stand Firmware13.gif|thumb|Model ll Power Stand Firmware1.3 post installation]]<br>

Note: You should restart your computer after applying the firmware update before attempting any further updates to your T1.

=== Fixes ===

Version 1.3 fixes a rare issue with the power stand firmware update process. On earlier versions the power stand could be affected by two failed 'L1 model II Firmware' updates in a row.

We recommend upgrading from 'L1 model II Firmware' version 1.0 or 1.1

=== Related ===

It is highly recommended that you also download and apply [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.8|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.8]] if you don't already have 1.6.

== Version 1.1 ==

'''<big>This is not required if you install [[{{PAGENAME}}#Version_1.3|L1® Model II Power Stand Firmware Version 1.3]] above</big>'''

<br> Download is no longer available because this version has been superseded by version 1.4


Date: 2007/08/10

Recommended for: All L1™ Model II Owners

Announcement: [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/8221072574/m/5791097384 New T1 and L1™ Firmware]

=== Fixes ===

==== System Hang / Blue Screen on T1™ ====

Fixes a bug where some power outages could cause the L1 model II to hang. This is related to the problems reported on the message board where some users have experienced a loss of audio sometimes accompanied by a blank blue T1 LCD screen.<ref>Message Board reports of [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/7521050644/m/3951024284 T1™ failures]</ref>

=== Enhancements ===

==== Fan Behavior ====

We've also made some changes to the fan behavior to make it less noticeable.

=== Related ===

It is highly recommended that you also download and apply [[T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates#Version_1.3|T1 ToneMatch® Audio Engine Firmware Updates Version 1.3]]

== Prior Versions ==

*Version 1.0 - Original as released from manufacturing (no download)

<br> <noinclude>
----
<references />
[[Category:Downloads]]
[[Category:Firmware Updates]]
[[Category:Model II]]
</noinclude>

Gibson L5 Wes Montgomery

2026-08-16T22:04:43Z

ST:

[[File:Gibson L5 Custom Wes Montgomery.jpg|300px|left|frameless|Gibson L5 Custom Wes Montgomery]]
'''Body & Construction'''

* '''Body Style:''' 17-inch hollowbody archtop (L-5 body dimensions with sharp Venetian cutaway)
* '''Top:''' Hand-carved solid spruce
* '''Back & Sides:''' Highly figured solid flame maple
* '''Binding:''' Multi-ply black and white binding on body, neck, headstock, and F-holes

'''Neck & Fretboard'''

* '''Neck Material:''' 5-piece high-grade maple with walnut center striping
* '''Scale Length:''' 25.5 inches
* '''Nut Width:''' 1 11/16 inches (1.6875")
* '''Fingerboard:''' High-grade ebony with mother-of-pearl block inlays
* '''Frets:''' 20 frets
* '''Headstock:''' Classic Gibson L-5 design with mother-of-pearl "Flowerpot" inlay

'''Electronics & Hardware'''

* '''Pickup:''' Single Gibson '57 Classic Humbucker (mounted exclusively in the neck position)
* '''Controls:''' 1 Master Volume, 1 Master Tone
* '''Bridge:''' ABR-1 Tune-o-Matic with an ebony base
* '''Tailpiece:''' Gold-plated L-5 trapeze tailpiece
* '''Hardware Finish:''' Gold

'''Gibson Custom L-5 Wes Montgomery Analysis'''

The '''Gibson L-5 Wes Montgomery''' is widely considered the ultimate "jazz box". Introduced as a dedicated signature model to honor jazz legend Wes Montgomery, this guitar replicates his preferred L-5 configuration—featuring a single neck humbucker directly over the body's sweet spot and an X-braced carved spruce top to maximize warm acoustic resonance without unnecessary body routs. Late-1990s models from Gibson's Historic/Custom division (often supervised or built by legendary master luthier James Hutchins) represent some of the highest-quality modern archtops Gibson ever produced.
----'''Reviews Summary'''

* '''The Ultimate Jazz Tone:''' Reviewers universally consider this the benchmark for traditional jazz tone. Removing the bridge pickup gives the single '57 Classic humbucker a thick, rich, and woodier acoustic response with incredible note definition and sustain.
* '''Masterwork Craftsmanship:''' Jazz players and collectors consistently highlight the stunning build quality. From the hand-carved solid spruce top and flamed maple back to the multi-ply binding and signature "Wes Montgomery" engraved gold trapeze tailpiece, it is revered as functional art.
* '''Playability & Feedback Management:''' The 25.5" scale length, ebony fingerboard, and classic 5-piece maple/walnut neck profile are praised for effortless playing. Being a full 17" carved hollow body archtop, players note that high stage volumes require careful placement to manage feedback, though its primary domain is controlled acoustic/amplified jazz settings.

----
[[Category:Guitar]]
[[Category:Gibson]]
[[Category:ST]]

Gibson L5 Wes Montgomery

2026-08-16T22:04:10Z

ST: reviews added

Gibson L5 Wes Montgomery

2026-08-16T22:02:14Z

ST:

Gibson L5 Wes Montgomery

2026-08-16T22:01:19Z

ST: Created page with "Gibson L5 Custom Wes Montgomery '''Body & Construction''' * '''Body Style:''' 17-inch hollowbody archtop (L-5 body dimensions with sharp Venetian cutaway) * '''Top:''' Hand-carved solid spruce * '''Back & Sides:''' Highly figured solid flame maple * '''Binding:''' Multi-ply black and white binding on body, neck, headstock, and F-holes '''Neck & Fretboard''' * '''Neck Material:''' 5-piece high-grade maple with..."

[[File:Gibson L5 Custom Wes Montgomery.jpg|left|frameless|Gibson L5 Custom Wes Montgomery]]
'''Body & Construction'''

* '''Body Style:''' 17-inch hollowbody archtop (L-5 body dimensions with sharp Venetian cutaway)
* '''Top:''' Hand-carved solid spruce
* '''Back & Sides:''' Highly figured solid flame maple
* '''Binding:''' Multi-ply black and white binding on body, neck, headstock, and F-holes

'''Neck & Fretboard'''

* '''Neck Material:''' 5-piece high-grade maple with walnut center striping
* '''Scale Length:''' 25.5 inches
* '''Nut Width:''' 1 11/16 inches (1.6875")
* '''Fingerboard:''' High-grade ebony with mother-of-pearl block inlays
* '''Frets:''' 20 frets
* '''Headstock:''' Classic Gibson L-5 design with mother-of-pearl "Flowerpot" inlay

'''Electronics & Hardware'''

* '''Pickup:''' Single Gibson '57 Classic Humbucker (mounted exclusively in the neck position)
* '''Controls:''' 1 Master Volume, 1 Master Tone
* '''Bridge:''' ABR-1 Tune-o-Matic with an ebony base
* '''Tailpiece:''' Gold-plated L-5 trapeze tailpiece
* '''Hardware Finish:''' Gold

File:Gibson L5 Custom Wes Montgomery.jpg

2026-08-16T21:59:40Z

ST:

Gibson L5 Custom Wes Montgomery

PRS Dragon III

2026-08-16T21:49:55Z

ST:

DRAGON III SPECS // LIMITED EDITION OF 100<ref>[https://prsguitars.com/blog/post/one_blog_all_nine_prs_dragon_guitars PRS Blog]</ref>

* [[File:DragonIIIwithNeck.jpg|alt=PRS Dragon III with teal-black curly maple top|PRS Dragon III with teal-black curly maple top]]One-piece mahogany wide-fat set-neck, rosewood fingerboard with third-style Dragon inlay
* 22 frets; “Dragon III” on truss-rod cover, gold inlaid signature on headstock, locking tuners
* Solid mahogany body, figured maple top
* Color options: amber, dark cherry, sunburst, indigo, teal black
* Two humbuckers (Dragon Treble & Bass)
* Volume, Tone, five-way rotary pickup switch
* PRS Stoptail

<html>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/v-GqEPMZBIE?si=5KYM4YV8XCP8E8Qu" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>

</html>

----
[[Category:PRS]]
[[Category:Guitar]]
[[Category:ST]]

File:DragonIIIwithNeck.jpg

2026-08-16T21:47:35Z

ST:

PRS Dragon III
Teal Black Curly Maple

PRS Santana MD

2026-08-16T21:40:03Z

ST:

https://strock.ca/guitars/santana/PRS%20Santana%20MD-1.jpg

===Specifications===
*Carved flame maple top
*Mahogany back
*Inlaid abalone purfling
*Mahogany "Santana" wide-fat neck
*Rosewood fretboard
*24.5" scale length
*24 frets
*PRS Tremolo bridge
*Low-mass locking tuners
*Santana MD Treble and Bass humbucking pickups
*Volume and Tone controls, 3-way toggle
*Mastering Voice Control circuit


Paul Reed Smith discusses the Mastering Volume Control used in both the Santana MD (Multi-Dimensional) and the McCarty II.
[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aaae-T7yXDk Paul Reed Smith Guitars McCarty II with Mike Ault]

<html>
<blockquote>
Increased options
<p>
The major difference is the Mastering Voice Control pot, powered by two nine-volt blocks (with a relatively short battery life of approximately 40 hours).
<p>
"Originally, Carlos Santana was looking for more tonal options from his guitar, more in the direction of Stevie Ray Vaughan," explains PRS's J Hayes. "So Paul came up with this active circuit that would give Carlos a '60s single-coil sound but without the hum issues that plague such instruments. The second version that is used in the McCarty II is based on the same concept."
<p>
The circuit is engaged by a mini-toggle switch — with the MVC switched out the guitar remains passive and will work even with dead batteries — and the tone control is replaced by a centre-notched pot which moves from the single-coil tones to "heavy metal sounds".
<p>
"It's completely variable," said Paul Reed Smith earlier this year, "like a pan pot on a console. And it was designed by a guy who does consoles. I couldn't be more pleased. Watching people's jaws drop has just been a hoot."
</blockquote>

<blockquote>
Mastering commander
<br>
Engaging the MVC does produce some noticeable background hiss. Turning it fully anti-clockwise produces that '60s single-coil sound and, as ever, with a little volume control reduction the sound is certainly accurate with reduced mids and a tighter low-end.
<p>
To our ears it's most useful with the mixed and neck positions - the former almost Tele-like in its hollowness, the latter with a little gain boost that sits nicely in Texas-y territory. Turn the MVC the other way and you're primarily hearing an enhanced low-end with slightly scooped mids (Smith believes the high-end to be "more Tele-like" but that's harder to perceive).
<p>
It certainly works for bigger 'metal' voices, but it's a little like moving from a small combo to a half-stack, or like a double-cut to a single-cut. To put it another way it's more than just metal and produces a really huge rhythm sound with even just '70s-era amp tones. In short, this is a vastly expanded McCarty.
<p>
With the quality of construction and finishing a byword at PRS - to be honest it's getting better - it's no surprise that this guitar is pro-spec'd and ready to go.
<br>
PRS's McCarty II does what it says on the tin. Aside from its solid passive performance - a real workhorse guitar for classic rock use - the new active circuit brings both a highly accurate single-coil tone (without the noticeable volume drop of the usual passive coil-splits) and a surprisingly useful 'metal' sound that can certainly be used for older rock rhythm styles too.
<p>
But as good as it is, we can't help thinking the MVC should be in a pedal, maybe with a gain boost, which could be mains-powered. That way we wouldn't have to shell out a considerable amount of cash for the guitar (as well as two nine-volt blocks every 40 hours). There are many players who simply wouldn't use active guitars but happily step nightly on active stomp boxes!
</blockquote>
<p>
Source: <a href="https://www.musicradar.com/reviews/guitars/prs-mccarty-ii-185701">Music Radar</a>
</html>

<html>
<blockquote>
Guitar weighs 8 lbs. The substantial case weighs 17 1/2 lbs. without the guitar.
This latter improved Santana model has the Om truss rod cover replaced with the Multi-Dimensional designation (MD) Paul Reed Smith and Santana came up with together. From PRS website:
<br>
"After nearly two decades of playing Paul Reed Smith guitars and three versions of his Santana Guitar models (Santana SE guitars aside), Carlos — along with Paul Reed Smith, of course! — has developed a Santana Signature model which combines some of the best features of all the previous models. Plus some cool new additions."
<p>
Santana MD: Guitar of Many Tones
<br>
"The “MD” designation in the model stands for “Multi-Dimensional,” and is a reference to the fact that the Santana MD can achieve a variety of tones. This quality makes it an ideal instrument for guitarists who want to produce a number of different sounds from the same guitar.
A large part of this “multidimensionality” resides in the electronic circuit. Besides the standard Santana Guitar Volume and Tone knobs, and 3-way pickup selector switch, it includes a mini-toggle that delivers a Strat-like ’60s tone — possibly by putting one or both of the pickups out of phase. The new function is called a “Mastering Voice Control.”
<p>
Something Old, Something New . . .
<br>
" In keeping with the “best of all possible world's theme, the PRS Santana MD guitar includes classic features from previous Santana guitars, like the traditional “Santana wide fat” neck shape, Rosewood fretboard, and Mahogany body with carved flame Maple top and Abalone Purfling.
However, there are changes as well. Most notably, the positions of the controls have been altered. While the 3-way pickup selector switch and Tone knob are still roughly between the tailpiece and the bridge, the Volume knob has been shifted to a position right next to the bridge pickup. This makes it easier to control the volume while playing, which Santana likes to do. The new mini-toggle is in between the two knobs.
<br>
Even the famed Abalone bird-shaped inlays on the fretboard have gotten a facelift: instead of being solid as on previous Santana guitar models, they’re outlined."
<p>
Santana Guitar Journey
<br>
"This latest foray into Santana Signature models is allegedly the result of a two-year process of refinement carried on by Carlos Santana and Paul Reed Smith. Part of the inspiration was the Stratocaster that Santana used on a Smokey Robinson album — and fell in love with."

</blockquote>
</html>

https://toonz.ca/guitars/santana/PRS%20Santana%20MD-4.jpg

https://toonz.ca/guitars/santana/PRS%20Santana%20MD-5.jpg

=== Paul Reed Smith Demo of McCarty II with MVC ===
Same MVC control circuitry as Santana MD

<html>

<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/aaae-T7yXDk?si=vjU1XeV5dWs8bGFw" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe>
</html>

----
[[Category:PRS]]
[[Category:ST]]

User:ST

2026-06-17T23:52:46Z

ST: /* Ultima / Princeton */

<html>
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="/shadowbox/shadowbox.css">
<script type="text/javascript" src="/shadowbox/shadowbox.js"></script>
<script type="text/javascript">
Shadowbox.init({
handleOversize: "drag",
modal: true
});
</script>

<style>
html {max-width:1066px;}

.leftColTOC {
float:left;
width:350px;
}
.rightColTOC{
margin-top:7px;
margin-left:10px;
padding:10px;
float:left;
clear:right;
max-width:50% ;
min-width:320px;
border: 1px solid blue;
-webkit-border-radius: 10px;
-moz-border-radius: 10px;
border-radius: 10px;

}

#toc {border: 1px solid blue;
-webkit-border-radius: 10px;
-moz-border-radius: 10px;
border-radius: 10px;
}
</style>

<div class="leftColTOC">
</html>
__TOC__

<html>
</div>

<div class="rightColTOC">
<a href="/images/scribblyDragon.jpg" rel="shadowbox" ><img border="0" src="/images/scribblyDragonThumb.gif" alt="Artifact of another life - click for a larger view" title="Artifact of another life - click for a larger view" align="right" >
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/d/d0/RattleSnakeNapkin400a.png" rel="shadowbox"><img src="/images/d/d0/RattleSnakeNapkin400a.png" width="200" alt="sketch on a napkin" title="sketch on a napkin" align="right" ></a>
<a href="/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" rel="shadowbox"><img src="/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" align="right" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose" title="self portrait: Meander Bose"></a>
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Links</h3>
</html>
* [https://twitter.com/ST_Muso Twitter]
* [https://www.linkedin.com/in/stpro/ LinkedIn]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com My blog]

<HTML>

</div>

<div style="clear:both;"></div>

</html>
== Current Role ==
Current (2026) — 2005 the principal author and curator of content on this site

=== Recent History ===
June 2016 — June 2020 Community Manager for the {{forum}} and Knowledge Manager at Bose Professional.

Mid-2016 I took on the role of Community Manager for the {{forum}}. In 2017 my Community Manager role expanded to encompass the Bose Pro Audio Community and [http://community.bose.com Bose Community] with a special focus on wireless headphones and Hearphones the conversation enhancing headphones.

2007-2016 Community Manager of the original Bose L1 Forum.

== Background ==
This is ST from the {{forum}}.

* I got my first {{L1}} in June 2004 and have been using the {{PAS}} in my solo, unplugged duo, and four-to-occasionally-seven piece eclectic band ever since. <br />
* In those early days I had no formal relationship with Bose Corporation but in early dealings with the Bose Live Music Technology Group I found them to be excellent people with a profound sense of the importance of live music. I felt compelled to help. <br />
* You may know me from my posts on the {{forum}} but you might be wondering about this site. If so, see [[Why this Website]]<br />
* [[The Sketcher]] — I am the author of this online tool for visualizing stage layouts.

You can read [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2005/03/07/st-whats-that-about/ a little background about me] in my blog.
* [https://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2015/06/12/eleven-years-of-bose/ Eleven Years of Bose]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2008/06/15/and-another-year-makes-four/ Four Year Anniversary Blog post]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2007/06/12/still-counting-after-3-years/ Three Year Anniversary Blog post]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2006/06/13/still-counting/ Two Year Anniversary Blog post]

* I was among the first group of individuals honoured by Bose as a [[Live Music Pioneer]]. <ref>Ken-at-Bose announces [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/4806048934/m/6541007893 Live Music Pioneers]</ref>

* My avatar/icon up to August 22, 2007 and my August 2009
<html><table>
<tr>
<td width="200"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/4/45/STIcon.gif" align="" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose" title="self portrait: Meander Bose"></td>
<td><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose II" title="self portrait: Meander Bose II"> </td>
</td></table>
</td>
</html>

* More avatar/icons 2010
<table><tr>
<td>[[Image:STCurrentIcon2010.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STPRSHBII.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STESArtist.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STHalloween.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STThanksgivingAni.gif]]
</td>

</tr>
</table>



== Other Sites ==
* [http://toonz.ca/Sketcher The Sketcher] Stage Layout Tool
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com my Bose Blog]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2005/03/07/st-whats-that-about ST a little background]

== Gear ==
We have enough {{L1 CR}}s to go '''1:1''' (one per player).
=== Duo ===
{{:Stage Layouts / ST Duo}}

=== Four Piece Band ===
==== L1® Setup ====
Four L1 Pro systems or {{Model II}} systems (could also be {{Model 1S}})

[[Image:Stage Layout 4 Piece Band.png|600px|Four Piece band]]

----

==== F1 Setup ====
In this setup I run two F1 Stacks (F1 Model 812 with F1 Subwoofer) for the Front of House system and two {{Compact}}s as monitors at the back of the stage. I've also see people set up the {{Compact}}s at the front of the stage facing back toward the performers, without the extensions.

[[Image:Four Piece Band F1 with Compacts.png|600px|Four Piece band with F1]]

----

=== What I run through my L1® ===

==== Electric Guitar ====
[[File:ST Tiger Eye Hands squarew1024.jpg|250px|right]]
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
</td>
<td valign="top">
</td>
</tr></table>

==== Hollow and Semi-Hollow Body Electrics ====
These guitars can sound terrific
* Through the {{T1}}/{{ToneMatch Mixers}} with Presets bypassed (making this Utility Flat)
* Straight into any {{L1PS}} no ToneMatch® Preset required, but use one if you prefer
* Straight into the {{Compact}} Channel 2 set to Line Level (no ToneMatch® Preset)
* Straight into the {{Model II}} Power Stand analog input (no preset or other processing)
* Straight into the {{S1}} with ToneMatch Switch off (no preset or other processing)

I do this with my other large hollowbody and semi-hollowbody electrics. They all sound great straight in.

And experiment with ToneMatch Presets like:

Category: Electric Guitar
<br>Preset: General Direct

Category: Electric Guitar
<br>Preset: Flat w/zEQ

On the {{S1}} try these to lighten up the low end
*The Guitar Preset
*The Microphone Preset

===== PRS JA-15 =====
[[File:PRS_JA-15-2.jpg|link=PRS JA-15|150px|click to learn more]]
<br>Click the picture to learn more

===== PRS SC-J =====
<html>Single Cut Jumbo, shown here
<br>
<div style="float:left;margin:5px;max-width:250px;">
<a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" rel="shadowbox[PRSSCJ]" title="with the Roland GK divided pickup I use with the Roland VG-99">
<img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" height="250" align="">
</a>
<br>with the Roland GK divided pickup I use with the Roland VG-99</div>

<div style="clear:both"></div>

</html>

===== Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery)=====
<html><a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/L5Wes01800.jpg" rel="shadowbox" ><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/L5Wes01800.jpg" style="border:0;float:right;height:200px; padding:10px" alt="Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery) " title="Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery) " > </a></html>
I run this several different ways:
* through the {{T1}} with Presets bypassed (making this Utility Flat)
* straight into the {{Compact}} Channel 2 set to Line Level (no ToneMatch® Preset)
* straight into the {{Model II}} Power Stand analog input (no preset or other processing)

I do the same with my other large hollowbody and semi-hollowbody electrics. They all sound great straight into the various L1®s.

==== Solid Body ====

===== PRS Private Stock Single Cut "Tiger Eye" =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
I frequently run this on {{T1}} Preset Electric Guitars / Paul Reed Smith Custom 22 (Classic preset #35) - clean - straight in, especially when playing with an unplugged group.

* T1® Preset
<br />Category: Electric Guitars
<br />Preset:PRS Custom 22

<br>Otherwise I'll use the [[Kemper Profiling Amp]]

[[File:KemperProfilingAmpWhite800x500.jpg|link=http://www.kemper-amps.com/|400px |Kemper Profiling Amp]]

[[Image:T1 Electric Guitars Flat E Guitar zEQ-400.png|300px|right|Flat E Guitar zEQ]]
* T1® Preset
<br />Category: Electric Guitars
<br />Flat E Guitar zEQ

</td>
<td style="vertical-align:top;">
<html><a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/tigereye/TigerEye02.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title='PRS Private Stock Single Cut "Tiger Eye"'><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/tigereye/TigerEye04.jpg" style="height:250px;float:right;border:0px;padding:10px"></a></html>
</td>
</tr></table>



===== Ultima / Princeton =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
Kickin' it old school. This is a guilty pleasure that I don't do in public. The reason? I haven't gotten around to having the 57 Princeton rewired with a ground. It can be a little dangerous on a live stage stage. Shocking!

* Gibson Ultima + 57 Princeton + SM 57
* T1® Preset
** Electric Guitars
** Miked Amp w/ SM 57
</td>
<td valign="top">
<html>
<a href="/images/4/48/UltimaPrinceton.jpg" rel="shadowbox"><img src="/images/4/48/UltimaPrinceton.jpg" style="width:200px" alt="Gibson Ultima and Princeton">
</html>

</td>
</tr></table>

===== Odyssey 500 / 600 =====
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/88/Odyssey500600.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title="Odyssey 600 and 500"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/88/Odyssey500600.jpg" style="width:400px" alt="Odyssey 600 and 500" ></a>
</html>



===== Artisan / Carvin =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
It's been a very long time since I fired up my [[{{PAGENAME}}#Carvin Quad-X Amp|Carvin Quad-X Amp]]. I used to run it through a stereo Mosvalve 500 into a Boogie 2x12 or 802s believe it or not.

Recently I ran a 77 Gibson Artisan into the Quad-X into the T1® to my Model II with 2 x B1s. Awesome.

* 4 channels - no waiting
* 5 effects loops
* 9 tubes
* Cabinet voicing
* Noise gate on first stage of preamp

Mine (yes of course I have two) are circa 1992. Discontinued around 1994. Some folks are still wondering why.

*I ran this into T1® Channel 4 using the Preset
** Category: Electric Guitars
** Preset: Gibson Les Paul

The Artisan also known as the Hearts and Flowers Les Paul is heavy, 12 pounds at least. Only to be worn with a neoprene strap for sure. We get Guitars for all kinds of reasons. I have no *good* reason for having this one but there is a lot of sentimental significance to it. So it's here to stay.
</td>
<td valign="top">
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/index.php?title=Carvin_Quad-X_Amp" rel="shadowbox"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/d/d1/CarvinQuad-X.jpg"></a>
<br>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/02/LesPaulArtisan.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title="Gibson Artisan / Les Paul Hearts and Flowers"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/02/LesPaulArtisan.jpg" style="width:150px"></a>
</html>

[http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6366055944/m/6471040445?r=3441050645#3441050645 Live discussion on the Message Board]

</td>
</tr></table>

===== Kemper Profiling Amp =====
The Kemper Profiling Amp is second only to the {{L1}} as a technology that has transformed the way I play music.
[[File:Kemper Profiler Stage.jpg|link=https://www.kemper-amps.com/stage|400px|right|Kemper Profiler Stage]]
[[File:KemperProfilingAmpWhite800x500.jpg|link=http://www.kemper-amps.com/|350px |Kemper Profiling Amp]]

I got the Kemper Profiler Stage (right) for outdoor battery-powered gigs. See [[Portable Power Stations]] for more details.

===== Old School =====
====== ST Mighty Rack======
Before the Kemper Profiling Amp I used to say, "When I want the absolute drop dead best electric sound I can muster I use this." Now I use the Kemper. It's lighter.

[[File:STMightyRack.png|link=ST Mighty Rack|600px|ST Mighty Rack]]

For more details please see: [[ST Mighty Rack]]

====== Carvin Quad-X Amp ======
For four straight ahead channels and all tube sound I sometimes use the Carvin Quad-X Amp. Despite the name, it is a preamp - all tubes. ( 12AX7s) and it came with a gigantic foot switch.

[[File:92 quadxamp-small.jpg|link=Carvin Quad-X Amp|600px]]

For more details please see: [[Carvin Quad-X Amp]]

====== Mesa/Boogie V-Twin ======
For traveling light (and backup almost always) I used to carry the Mesa/Boogie V-Twin.


[[File:Mesa Boogie V-Twin mini.gif|link=Mesa/Boogie V-Twin|270px|Mesa/Boogie V-Twin]]

For more details please see: [http://www.mesaboogie.com/Product_Info/Out_of%20_Production/V-Twin/v-twin.html Mesa Boogie V-Twin]

===== Virtual Guitar - Roland VG-99, VG-88 & VG-8 =====
When I want a huge palette of sounds that extends beyond traditional guitar then I use [http://www.roland.com/products/en/VG-99/ Roland VG-99],

[[Image:Vg-99top.jpg|400px|Roland VG-99]] <html><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" style="float:right;height=200px"></html>

and occasionally the older VG-88 or VG-8.

[[Image:Gibson80p33.jpg|300px|right|Gibson ES Artist]]
[[Image:Roland VG-88.jpg|400px|Roland VG-88 Version 2]]<br />[http://www.roland.com/products/en/VG-88_Version_2/ Details]

I have a Roland GK2 pickup mounted on my [[Gibson ES Artist]] (blasphemy?). I run that to the VG-88 and then to the T1® with using one of the following Presets:

* Utility Flat
* Prerecorded Music / Low Volume
* Prerecorded Music / High Volume

If you are familiar with the GK2/3 pickups you know that you can also run the electric guitar sound direct to the VG-88. I run that to a separate T1® Channel and use one of these Presets:
* Electric Guitars / Miked Amp w/SM57
* Electric Guitars / Miked Amp w/e609
* Electric Guitars / General Direct

I don't feel as though I have fully explored the VG-88 so the VG-99 is on the back burner for now.

In case you are wondering, I normally run mono. Stereo sounds great but for me, there is not enough benefit to warrant bringing two L1®s to run stereo.

==== Acoustic Guitar ====
[[Image:Larrivee150.png|thumb|right|Larrivée C10-bz]][[File:C10Morgan.jpg|300px|Larrivée C10 BZ and Morgan Concert Cutaway]]


{{:Larrivee & Morgan T1® Settings}}
[[Larrivée Guitars|Larrivée]] with [http://www.lrbaggs.com/html/products/systems_imix.shtml L.R. Baggs iMix no-cut] pickup system. I just had this installed because I wanted to start playing this instrument at live gigs.
* {{T1 no link}} Preset
** Category: L.R. Baggs / Preset: iMix

==== Microphone ====
===== Condenser Microphone =====
[[Image:Kms105Thumb.jpg|100px|right]] Neumann KMS 105
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Neumann KMS 105
*Model I / Classic
** #12 KMS 105

===== Dynamic Microphones =====
====== Sennheiser MD 441 ======
[[File:Sennheiser MD 441 vertical.jpg|50px|right|link=Sennheiser MD 441]]
[[Sennheiser MD 441]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Flat, Vocal zEQ OR<br>Sennheiser MD 431-II

====== Sennheiser MD 445 ======
[[File:Sennheiser MD 445.jpg|50px|right|link=Sennheiser MD 445]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Flat, Vocal zEQ OR<br>Sennheiser e 855 OR<br>Sennheiser MD 431-II

===== Headworn Microphone =====
Crown CM311a [[Image:Cm311a-2.gif|right]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Headworn Mics
*Model I / Classic
** #02 Headworn Microphones

==== Vocal Processor / Guitar Effects ====
For gigs in really tight places I have been using the [http://www.tc-helicon.com/products/voicelive-play-gtx TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX] since mid-2012. {{#img: image=Voicelive-play-gtx_top.jpg |page=TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX to Compact| width=150px |title=TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX }}. This unit was replaced by the TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3.

In January 2014 the
[http://www.tc-helicon.com/products/voicelive-3 TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3] was released and I've been experimenting with that. {{#img: image=Tch-voicelive-3-floor.jpg |page=TC-Helicon_VoiceLive_3_to_Compact| width=300px |title=TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3}}

The big appeal for me was the guitar amp emulations, looper, and ''adaptive tone'' features. I haven't used the harmony features. The small form-factor was a big part of the decision to use these.

Update: I found that I wasn't the vocal features. I got the Kemper Profiling Amp and these were so much better than the TC-Helicon guitar amp emulations, so I stopped using the latter. And finally, I had planned to use the looper as a practice tool, and for capturing song ideas. In the end it was simpler to capture the ideas directly to the computer using the T1® USB interface and some recording software. The VoiceLive 3 has left the building.

== Doing Sound ==
Doing Sound - or "Being the Sound Guy" was never on my list of things to accomplish.

If someone were to ask me how to use the L1®s to provide sound reinforcement for live musicians I would insist that s/he watch three video presentations before doing anything else.

* [[The L1® Approach and the History Of Amplification]]
* [[Clifford Henricksen Introduces the L1®]]
* [[Cliff Goodwin|Playing better with the L1® System - Cliff Goodwin]]

Then I would offer these gig reports of four of the shows where I supported several acts crossing a stage using multiple L1®s at the back of the stage.

* [[Gig Report / 8 Live Acts 7 Hours]]
* [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6806048934/m/237109823 Lots of acts: Lots of L1®s]
* [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6806048934/m/686106993 Butting Heads over the Sound - Taking One for the Team]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2006/03/27/but-i-never-wanted-to-be-the-sound-guy/ But I Never Wanted To Be the Sound Guy]

And some notes about working with performers.
[[Introducing Performers to the Bose System]]

== History ==
=== First Post on the Message Board ===
Just in case the site gets reorganized and we lose it here is [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/4806048934/m/279101525?r=370107355#370107355 my first post on the message board].
<blockquote>
:I was there on Thursday (had the flu and very nearly didn't go).

:Ended up sitting about 5 feet in front of Tony Sarno (I was in the front row). I was blown away without being blown away. If you ever get a chance to sit that close to a band running PASs you that bizarre statement will make sense.

:Had a great chat with Tony and Wolf after the show.

:Friday morning as soon as L&M (the store that sponsored the show) opened, I picked up my PAS. (one bass module)

:Since I'm under the weather, I took the rest of the day to get to know the unit. Good times.

:Get my first chance to try it out live tonight.

:Many many thanks to all the people at Bose who made the investment to travel to Canada.

:I was somewhat taken aback that Bose would make so large an investment (you sent what - 10 people including the band?)

:Tony, if you happen to see this, I'll send you the information about the McIntyre amp later today.

:Wolfe, if you happen to see this, I'm the guy with the Musicman EVH and the PRSs.

:I'll post more about how I intend to use it and some questions in the other forums.
</blockquote>

----
[[Category:Pioneer]]
[[Category:ST]]

User:ST

2026-06-17T23:51:11Z

ST:

<html>
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="/shadowbox/shadowbox.css">
<script type="text/javascript" src="/shadowbox/shadowbox.js"></script>
<script type="text/javascript">
Shadowbox.init({
handleOversize: "drag",
modal: true
});
</script>

<style>
html {max-width:1066px;}

.leftColTOC {
float:left;
width:350px;
}
.rightColTOC{
margin-top:7px;
margin-left:10px;
padding:10px;
float:left;
clear:right;
max-width:50% ;
min-width:320px;
border: 1px solid blue;
-webkit-border-radius: 10px;
-moz-border-radius: 10px;
border-radius: 10px;

}

#toc {border: 1px solid blue;
-webkit-border-radius: 10px;
-moz-border-radius: 10px;
border-radius: 10px;
}
</style>

<div class="leftColTOC">
</html>
__TOC__

<html>
</div>

<div class="rightColTOC">
<a href="/images/scribblyDragon.jpg" rel="shadowbox" ><img border="0" src="/images/scribblyDragonThumb.gif" alt="Artifact of another life - click for a larger view" title="Artifact of another life - click for a larger view" align="right" >
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/d/d0/RattleSnakeNapkin400a.png" rel="shadowbox"><img src="/images/d/d0/RattleSnakeNapkin400a.png" width="200" alt="sketch on a napkin" title="sketch on a napkin" align="right" ></a>
<a href="/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" rel="shadowbox"><img src="/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" align="right" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose" title="self portrait: Meander Bose"></a>
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Links</h3>
</html>
* [https://twitter.com/ST_Muso Twitter]
* [https://www.linkedin.com/in/stpro/ LinkedIn]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com My blog]

<HTML>

</div>

<div style="clear:both;"></div>

</html>
== Current Role ==
Current (2026) — 2005 the principal author and curator of content on this site

=== Recent History ===
June 2016 — June 2020 Community Manager for the {{forum}} and Knowledge Manager at Bose Professional.

Mid-2016 I took on the role of Community Manager for the {{forum}}. In 2017 my Community Manager role expanded to encompass the Bose Pro Audio Community and [http://community.bose.com Bose Community] with a special focus on wireless headphones and Hearphones the conversation enhancing headphones.

2007-2016 Community Manager of the original Bose L1 Forum.

== Background ==
This is ST from the {{forum}}.

* I got my first {{L1}} in June 2004 and have been using the {{PAS}} in my solo, unplugged duo, and four-to-occasionally-seven piece eclectic band ever since. <br />
* In those early days I had no formal relationship with Bose Corporation but in early dealings with the Bose Live Music Technology Group I found them to be excellent people with a profound sense of the importance of live music. I felt compelled to help. <br />
* You may know me from my posts on the {{forum}} but you might be wondering about this site. If so, see [[Why this Website]]<br />
* [[The Sketcher]] — I am the author of this online tool for visualizing stage layouts.

You can read [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2005/03/07/st-whats-that-about/ a little background about me] in my blog.
* [https://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2015/06/12/eleven-years-of-bose/ Eleven Years of Bose]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2008/06/15/and-another-year-makes-four/ Four Year Anniversary Blog post]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2007/06/12/still-counting-after-3-years/ Three Year Anniversary Blog post]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2006/06/13/still-counting/ Two Year Anniversary Blog post]

* I was among the first group of individuals honoured by Bose as a [[Live Music Pioneer]]. <ref>Ken-at-Bose announces [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/4806048934/m/6541007893 Live Music Pioneers]</ref>

* My avatar/icon up to August 22, 2007 and my August 2009
<html><table>
<tr>
<td width="200"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/4/45/STIcon.gif" align="" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose" title="self portrait: Meander Bose"></td>
<td><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose II" title="self portrait: Meander Bose II"> </td>
</td></table>
</td>
</html>

* More avatar/icons 2010
<table><tr>
<td>[[Image:STCurrentIcon2010.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STPRSHBII.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STESArtist.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STHalloween.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STThanksgivingAni.gif]]
</td>

</tr>
</table>



== Other Sites ==
* [http://toonz.ca/Sketcher The Sketcher] Stage Layout Tool
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com my Bose Blog]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2005/03/07/st-whats-that-about ST a little background]

== Gear ==
We have enough {{L1 CR}}s to go '''1:1''' (one per player).
=== Duo ===
{{:Stage Layouts / ST Duo}}

=== Four Piece Band ===
==== L1® Setup ====
Four L1 Pro systems or {{Model II}} systems (could also be {{Model 1S}})

[[Image:Stage Layout 4 Piece Band.png|600px|Four Piece band]]

----

==== F1 Setup ====
In this setup I run two F1 Stacks (F1 Model 812 with F1 Subwoofer) for the Front of House system and two {{Compact}}s as monitors at the back of the stage. I've also see people set up the {{Compact}}s at the front of the stage facing back toward the performers, without the extensions.

[[Image:Four Piece Band F1 with Compacts.png|600px|Four Piece band with F1]]

----

=== What I run through my L1® ===

==== Electric Guitar ====
[[File:ST Tiger Eye Hands squarew1024.jpg|250px|right]]
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
</td>
<td valign="top">
</td>
</tr></table>

==== Hollow and Semi-Hollow Body Electrics ====
These guitars can sound terrific
* Through the {{T1}}/{{ToneMatch Mixers}} with Presets bypassed (making this Utility Flat)
* Straight into any {{L1PS}} no ToneMatch® Preset required, but use one if you prefer
* Straight into the {{Compact}} Channel 2 set to Line Level (no ToneMatch® Preset)
* Straight into the {{Model II}} Power Stand analog input (no preset or other processing)
* Straight into the {{S1}} with ToneMatch Switch off (no preset or other processing)

I do this with my other large hollowbody and semi-hollowbody electrics. They all sound great straight in.

And experiment with ToneMatch Presets like:

Category: Electric Guitar
<br>Preset: General Direct

Category: Electric Guitar
<br>Preset: Flat w/zEQ

On the {{S1}} try these to lighten up the low end
*The Guitar Preset
*The Microphone Preset

===== PRS JA-15 =====
[[File:PRS_JA-15-2.jpg|link=PRS JA-15|150px|click to learn more]]
<br>Click the picture to learn more

===== PRS SC-J =====
<html>Single Cut Jumbo, shown here
<br>
<div style="float:left;margin:5px;max-width:250px;">
<a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" rel="shadowbox[PRSSCJ]" title="with the Roland GK divided pickup I use with the Roland VG-99">
<img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" height="250" align="">
</a>
<br>with the Roland GK divided pickup I use with the Roland VG-99</div>

<div style="clear:both"></div>

</html>

===== Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery)=====
<html><a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/L5Wes01800.jpg" rel="shadowbox" ><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/L5Wes01800.jpg" style="border:0;float:right;height:200px; padding:10px" alt="Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery) " title="Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery) " > </a></html>
I run this several different ways:
* through the {{T1}} with Presets bypassed (making this Utility Flat)
* straight into the {{Compact}} Channel 2 set to Line Level (no ToneMatch® Preset)
* straight into the {{Model II}} Power Stand analog input (no preset or other processing)

I do the same with my other large hollowbody and semi-hollowbody electrics. They all sound great straight into the various L1®s.

==== Solid Body ====

===== PRS Private Stock Single Cut "Tiger Eye" =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
I frequently run this on {{T1}} Preset Electric Guitars / Paul Reed Smith Custom 22 (Classic preset #35) - clean - straight in, especially when playing with an unplugged group.

* T1® Preset
<br />Category: Electric Guitars
<br />Preset:PRS Custom 22

<br>Otherwise I'll use the [[Kemper Profiling Amp]]

[[File:KemperProfilingAmpWhite800x500.jpg|link=http://www.kemper-amps.com/|400px |Kemper Profiling Amp]]

[[Image:T1 Electric Guitars Flat E Guitar zEQ-400.png|300px|right|Flat E Guitar zEQ]]
* T1® Preset
<br />Category: Electric Guitars
<br />Flat E Guitar zEQ

</td>
<td style="vertical-align:top;">
<html><a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/tigereye/TigerEye02.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title='PRS Private Stock Single Cut "Tiger Eye"'><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/tigereye/TigerEye04.jpg" style="height:250px;float:right;border:0px;padding:10px"></a></html>
</td>
</tr></table>



===== Ultima / Princeton =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
Kickin' it old school. This is a guilty pleasure that I don't do in public. The reason? I haven't gotten around to having the 57 Princeton rewired with a ground. It can be a little dangerous on a live stage stage. Shocking!

* Gibson Ultima + 57 Princeton + SM 57
* T1® Preset
** Electric Guitars
** Miked Amp w/ SM 57
</td>
<td valign="top">
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/4/48/UltimaPrinceton.jpg" rel="shadowbox"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/4/48/UltimaPrinceton.jpg" style="width:200px" alt="Gibson Ultima and Princeton">
</html>

</td>
</tr></table>

===== Odyssey 500 / 600 =====
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/88/Odyssey500600.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title="Odyssey 600 and 500"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/88/Odyssey500600.jpg" style="width:400px" alt="Odyssey 600 and 500" ></a>
</html>



===== Artisan / Carvin =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
It's been a very long time since I fired up my [[{{PAGENAME}}#Carvin Quad-X Amp|Carvin Quad-X Amp]]. I used to run it through a stereo Mosvalve 500 into a Boogie 2x12 or 802s believe it or not.

Recently I ran a 77 Gibson Artisan into the Quad-X into the T1® to my Model II with 2 x B1s. Awesome.

* 4 channels - no waiting
* 5 effects loops
* 9 tubes
* Cabinet voicing
* Noise gate on first stage of preamp

Mine (yes of course I have two) are circa 1992. Discontinued around 1994. Some folks are still wondering why.

*I ran this into T1® Channel 4 using the Preset
** Category: Electric Guitars
** Preset: Gibson Les Paul

The Artisan also known as the Hearts and Flowers Les Paul is heavy, 12 pounds at least. Only to be worn with a neoprene strap for sure. We get Guitars for all kinds of reasons. I have no *good* reason for having this one but there is a lot of sentimental significance to it. So it's here to stay.
</td>
<td valign="top">
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/index.php?title=Carvin_Quad-X_Amp" rel="shadowbox"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/d/d1/CarvinQuad-X.jpg"></a>
<br>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/02/LesPaulArtisan.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title="Gibson Artisan / Les Paul Hearts and Flowers"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/02/LesPaulArtisan.jpg" style="width:150px"></a>
</html>

[http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6366055944/m/6471040445?r=3441050645#3441050645 Live discussion on the Message Board]

</td>
</tr></table>

===== Kemper Profiling Amp =====
The Kemper Profiling Amp is second only to the {{L1}} as a technology that has transformed the way I play music.
[[File:Kemper Profiler Stage.jpg|link=https://www.kemper-amps.com/stage|400px|right|Kemper Profiler Stage]]
[[File:KemperProfilingAmpWhite800x500.jpg|link=http://www.kemper-amps.com/|350px |Kemper Profiling Amp]]

I got the Kemper Profiler Stage (right) for outdoor battery-powered gigs. See [[Portable Power Stations]] for more details.

===== Old School =====
====== ST Mighty Rack======
Before the Kemper Profiling Amp I used to say, "When I want the absolute drop dead best electric sound I can muster I use this." Now I use the Kemper. It's lighter.

[[File:STMightyRack.png|link=ST Mighty Rack|600px|ST Mighty Rack]]

For more details please see: [[ST Mighty Rack]]

====== Carvin Quad-X Amp ======
For four straight ahead channels and all tube sound I sometimes use the Carvin Quad-X Amp. Despite the name, it is a preamp - all tubes. ( 12AX7s) and it came with a gigantic foot switch.

[[File:92 quadxamp-small.jpg|link=Carvin Quad-X Amp|600px]]

For more details please see: [[Carvin Quad-X Amp]]

====== Mesa/Boogie V-Twin ======
For traveling light (and backup almost always) I used to carry the Mesa/Boogie V-Twin.


[[File:Mesa Boogie V-Twin mini.gif|link=Mesa/Boogie V-Twin|270px|Mesa/Boogie V-Twin]]

For more details please see: [http://www.mesaboogie.com/Product_Info/Out_of%20_Production/V-Twin/v-twin.html Mesa Boogie V-Twin]

===== Virtual Guitar - Roland VG-99, VG-88 & VG-8 =====
When I want a huge palette of sounds that extends beyond traditional guitar then I use [http://www.roland.com/products/en/VG-99/ Roland VG-99],

[[Image:Vg-99top.jpg|400px|Roland VG-99]] <html><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" style="float:right;height=200px"></html>

and occasionally the older VG-88 or VG-8.

[[Image:Gibson80p33.jpg|300px|right|Gibson ES Artist]]
[[Image:Roland VG-88.jpg|400px|Roland VG-88 Version 2]]<br />[http://www.roland.com/products/en/VG-88_Version_2/ Details]

I have a Roland GK2 pickup mounted on my [[Gibson ES Artist]] (blasphemy?). I run that to the VG-88 and then to the T1® with using one of the following Presets:

* Utility Flat
* Prerecorded Music / Low Volume
* Prerecorded Music / High Volume

If you are familiar with the GK2/3 pickups you know that you can also run the electric guitar sound direct to the VG-88. I run that to a separate T1® Channel and use one of these Presets:
* Electric Guitars / Miked Amp w/SM57
* Electric Guitars / Miked Amp w/e609
* Electric Guitars / General Direct

I don't feel as though I have fully explored the VG-88 so the VG-99 is on the back burner for now.

In case you are wondering, I normally run mono. Stereo sounds great but for me, there is not enough benefit to warrant bringing two L1®s to run stereo.

==== Acoustic Guitar ====
[[Image:Larrivee150.png|thumb|right|Larrivée C10-bz]][[File:C10Morgan.jpg|300px|Larrivée C10 BZ and Morgan Concert Cutaway]]


{{:Larrivee & Morgan T1® Settings}}
[[Larrivée Guitars|Larrivée]] with [http://www.lrbaggs.com/html/products/systems_imix.shtml L.R. Baggs iMix no-cut] pickup system. I just had this installed because I wanted to start playing this instrument at live gigs.
* {{T1 no link}} Preset
** Category: L.R. Baggs / Preset: iMix

==== Microphone ====
===== Condenser Microphone =====
[[Image:Kms105Thumb.jpg|100px|right]] Neumann KMS 105
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Neumann KMS 105
*Model I / Classic
** #12 KMS 105

===== Dynamic Microphones =====
====== Sennheiser MD 441 ======
[[File:Sennheiser MD 441 vertical.jpg|50px|right|link=Sennheiser MD 441]]
[[Sennheiser MD 441]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Flat, Vocal zEQ OR<br>Sennheiser MD 431-II

====== Sennheiser MD 445 ======
[[File:Sennheiser MD 445.jpg|50px|right|link=Sennheiser MD 445]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Flat, Vocal zEQ OR<br>Sennheiser e 855 OR<br>Sennheiser MD 431-II

===== Headworn Microphone =====
Crown CM311a [[Image:Cm311a-2.gif|right]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Headworn Mics
*Model I / Classic
** #02 Headworn Microphones

==== Vocal Processor / Guitar Effects ====
For gigs in really tight places I have been using the [http://www.tc-helicon.com/products/voicelive-play-gtx TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX] since mid-2012. {{#img: image=Voicelive-play-gtx_top.jpg |page=TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX to Compact| width=150px |title=TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX }}. This unit was replaced by the TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3.

In January 2014 the
[http://www.tc-helicon.com/products/voicelive-3 TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3] was released and I've been experimenting with that. {{#img: image=Tch-voicelive-3-floor.jpg |page=TC-Helicon_VoiceLive_3_to_Compact| width=300px |title=TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3}}

The big appeal for me was the guitar amp emulations, looper, and ''adaptive tone'' features. I haven't used the harmony features. The small form-factor was a big part of the decision to use these.

Update: I found that I wasn't the vocal features. I got the Kemper Profiling Amp and these were so much better than the TC-Helicon guitar amp emulations, so I stopped using the latter. And finally, I had planned to use the looper as a practice tool, and for capturing song ideas. In the end it was simpler to capture the ideas directly to the computer using the T1® USB interface and some recording software. The VoiceLive 3 has left the building.

== Doing Sound ==
Doing Sound - or "Being the Sound Guy" was never on my list of things to accomplish.

If someone were to ask me how to use the L1®s to provide sound reinforcement for live musicians I would insist that s/he watch three video presentations before doing anything else.

* [[The L1® Approach and the History Of Amplification]]
* [[Clifford Henricksen Introduces the L1®]]
* [[Cliff Goodwin|Playing better with the L1® System - Cliff Goodwin]]

Then I would offer these gig reports of four of the shows where I supported several acts crossing a stage using multiple L1®s at the back of the stage.

* [[Gig Report / 8 Live Acts 7 Hours]]
* [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6806048934/m/237109823 Lots of acts: Lots of L1®s]
* [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6806048934/m/686106993 Butting Heads over the Sound - Taking One for the Team]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2006/03/27/but-i-never-wanted-to-be-the-sound-guy/ But I Never Wanted To Be the Sound Guy]

And some notes about working with performers.
[[Introducing Performers to the Bose System]]

== History ==
=== First Post on the Message Board ===
Just in case the site gets reorganized and we lose it here is [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/4806048934/m/279101525?r=370107355#370107355 my first post on the message board].
<blockquote>
:I was there on Thursday (had the flu and very nearly didn't go).

:Ended up sitting about 5 feet in front of Tony Sarno (I was in the front row). I was blown away without being blown away. If you ever get a chance to sit that close to a band running PASs you that bizarre statement will make sense.

:Had a great chat with Tony and Wolf after the show.

:Friday morning as soon as L&M (the store that sponsored the show) opened, I picked up my PAS. (one bass module)

:Since I'm under the weather, I took the rest of the day to get to know the unit. Good times.

:Get my first chance to try it out live tonight.

:Many many thanks to all the people at Bose who made the investment to travel to Canada.

:I was somewhat taken aback that Bose would make so large an investment (you sent what - 10 people including the band?)

:Tony, if you happen to see this, I'll send you the information about the McIntyre amp later today.

:Wolfe, if you happen to see this, I'm the guy with the Musicman EVH and the PRSs.

:I'll post more about how I intend to use it and some questions in the other forums.
</blockquote>

----
[[Category:Pioneer]]
[[Category:ST]]

User:ST

2026-06-17T23:49:47Z

ST:

<html>
<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="/shadowbox/shadowbox.css">
<script type="text/javascript" src="/shadowbox/shadowbox.js"></script>
<script type="text/javascript">
Shadowbox.init({
handleOversize: "drag",
modal: true
});
</script>

<style>
html {max-width:1066px;}

.leftColTOC {
float:left;
width:350px;
}
.rightColTOC{
margin-top:7px;
margin-left:10px;
padding:10px;
float:left;
clear:right;
max-width:50% ;
min-width:320px;
border: 1px solid blue;
-webkit-border-radius: 10px;
-moz-border-radius: 10px;
border-radius: 10px;

}

#toc {border: 1px solid blue;
-webkit-border-radius: 10px;
-moz-border-radius: 10px;
border-radius: 10px;
}
</style>

<div class="leftColTOC">
</html>
__TOC__

<html>
</div>

<div class="rightColTOC">
<a href="/images/scribblyDragon.jpg" rel="shadowbox" ><img border="0" src="http://toonz.ca/images/scribblyDragonThumb.gif" alt="Artifact of another life - click for a larger view" title="Artifact of another life - click for a larger view" align="right" >
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/d/d0/RattleSnakeNapkin400a.png" rel="shadowbox"><img src="/images/d/d0/RattleSnakeNapkin400a.png" width="200" alt="sketch on a napkin" title="sketch on a napkin" align="right" ></a>
<a href="/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" rel="shadowbox"><img src="/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" align="right" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose" title="self portrait: Meander Bose"></a>
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Links</h3>
</html>
* [https://twitter.com/ST_Muso Twitter]
* [https://www.linkedin.com/in/stpro/ LinkedIn]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com My blog]

<HTML>

</div>

<div style="clear:both;"></div>

</html>
== Current Role ==
Current (2026) — 2005 the principal author and curator of content on this site

=== Recent History ===
June 2016 — June 2020 Community Manager for the {{forum}} and Knowledge Manager at Bose Professional.

Mid-2016 I took on the role of Community Manager for the {{forum}}. In 2017 my Community Manager role expanded to encompass the Bose Pro Audio Community and [http://community.bose.com Bose Community] with a special focus on wireless headphones and Hearphones the conversation enhancing headphones.

2007-2016 Community Manager of the original Bose L1 Forum.

== Background ==
This is ST from the {{forum}}.

* I got my first {{L1}} in June 2004 and have been using the {{PAS}} in my solo, unplugged duo, and four-to-occasionally-seven piece eclectic band ever since. <br />
* In those early days I had no formal relationship with Bose Corporation but in early dealings with the Bose Live Music Technology Group I found them to be excellent people with a profound sense of the importance of live music. I felt compelled to help. <br />
* You may know me from my posts on the {{forum}} but you might be wondering about this site. If so, see [[Why this Website]]<br />
* [[The Sketcher]] — I am the author of this online tool for visualizing stage layouts.

You can read [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2005/03/07/st-whats-that-about/ a little background about me] in my blog.
* [https://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2015/06/12/eleven-years-of-bose/ Eleven Years of Bose]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2008/06/15/and-another-year-makes-four/ Four Year Anniversary Blog post]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2007/06/12/still-counting-after-3-years/ Three Year Anniversary Blog post]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2006/06/13/still-counting/ Two Year Anniversary Blog post]

* I was among the first group of individuals honoured by Bose as a [[Live Music Pioneer]]. <ref>Ken-at-Bose announces [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/4806048934/m/6541007893 Live Music Pioneers]</ref>

* My avatar/icon up to August 22, 2007 and my August 2009
<html><table>
<tr>
<td width="200"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/4/45/STIcon.gif" align="" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose" title="self portrait: Meander Bose"></td>
<td><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/08/StIconModelII.gif" alt="self portrait: Meander Bose II" title="self portrait: Meander Bose II"> </td>
</td></table>
</td>
</html>

* More avatar/icons 2010
<table><tr>
<td>[[Image:STCurrentIcon2010.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STPRSHBII.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STESArtist.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STHalloween.png]]
</td>
<td>[[Image:STThanksgivingAni.gif]]
</td>

</tr>
</table>



== Other Sites ==
* [http://toonz.ca/Sketcher The Sketcher] Stage Layout Tool
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com my Bose Blog]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2005/03/07/st-whats-that-about ST a little background]

== Gear ==
We have enough {{L1 CR}}s to go '''1:1''' (one per player).
=== Duo ===
{{:Stage Layouts / ST Duo}}

=== Four Piece Band ===
==== L1® Setup ====
Four L1 Pro systems or {{Model II}} systems (could also be {{Model 1S}})

[[Image:Stage Layout 4 Piece Band.png|600px|Four Piece band]]

----

==== F1 Setup ====
In this setup I run two F1 Stacks (F1 Model 812 with F1 Subwoofer) for the Front of House system and two {{Compact}}s as monitors at the back of the stage. I've also see people set up the {{Compact}}s at the front of the stage facing back toward the performers, without the extensions.

[[Image:Four Piece Band F1 with Compacts.png|600px|Four Piece band with F1]]

----

=== What I run through my L1® ===

==== Electric Guitar ====
[[File:ST Tiger Eye Hands squarew1024.jpg|250px|right]]
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
</td>
<td valign="top">
</td>
</tr></table>

==== Hollow and Semi-Hollow Body Electrics ====
These guitars can sound terrific
* Through the {{T1}}/{{ToneMatch Mixers}} with Presets bypassed (making this Utility Flat)
* Straight into any {{L1PS}} no ToneMatch® Preset required, but use one if you prefer
* Straight into the {{Compact}} Channel 2 set to Line Level (no ToneMatch® Preset)
* Straight into the {{Model II}} Power Stand analog input (no preset or other processing)
* Straight into the {{S1}} with ToneMatch Switch off (no preset or other processing)

I do this with my other large hollowbody and semi-hollowbody electrics. They all sound great straight in.

And experiment with ToneMatch Presets like:

Category: Electric Guitar
<br>Preset: General Direct

Category: Electric Guitar
<br>Preset: Flat w/zEQ

On the {{S1}} try these to lighten up the low end
*The Guitar Preset
*The Microphone Preset

===== PRS JA-15 =====
[[File:PRS_JA-15-2.jpg|link=PRS JA-15|150px|click to learn more]]
<br>Click the picture to learn more

===== PRS SC-J =====
<html>Single Cut Jumbo, shown here
<br>
<div style="float:left;margin:5px;max-width:250px;">
<a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" rel="shadowbox[PRSSCJ]" title="with the Roland GK divided pickup I use with the Roland VG-99">
<img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" height="250" align="">
</a>
<br>with the Roland GK divided pickup I use with the Roland VG-99</div>

<div style="clear:both"></div>

</html>

===== Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery)=====
<html><a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/L5Wes01800.jpg" rel="shadowbox" ><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/L5Wes01800.jpg" style="border:0;float:right;height:200px; padding:10px" alt="Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery) " title="Gibson L5-CES (Wes Montgomery) " > </a></html>
I run this several different ways:
* through the {{T1}} with Presets bypassed (making this Utility Flat)
* straight into the {{Compact}} Channel 2 set to Line Level (no ToneMatch® Preset)
* straight into the {{Model II}} Power Stand analog input (no preset or other processing)

I do the same with my other large hollowbody and semi-hollowbody electrics. They all sound great straight into the various L1®s.

==== Solid Body ====

===== PRS Private Stock Single Cut "Tiger Eye" =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
I frequently run this on {{T1}} Preset Electric Guitars / Paul Reed Smith Custom 22 (Classic preset #35) - clean - straight in, especially when playing with an unplugged group.

* T1® Preset
<br />Category: Electric Guitars
<br />Preset:PRS Custom 22

<br>Otherwise I'll use the [[Kemper Profiling Amp]]

[[File:KemperProfilingAmpWhite800x500.jpg|link=http://www.kemper-amps.com/|400px |Kemper Profiling Amp]]

[[Image:T1 Electric Guitars Flat E Guitar zEQ-400.png|300px|right|Flat E Guitar zEQ]]
* T1® Preset
<br />Category: Electric Guitars
<br />Flat E Guitar zEQ

</td>
<td style="vertical-align:top;">
<html><a href="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/tigereye/TigerEye02.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title='PRS Private Stock Single Cut "Tiger Eye"'><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/tigereye/TigerEye04.jpg" style="height:250px;float:right;border:0px;padding:10px"></a></html>
</td>
</tr></table>



===== Ultima / Princeton =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
Kickin' it old school. This is a guilty pleasure that I don't do in public. The reason? I haven't gotten around to having the 57 Princeton rewired with a ground. It can be a little dangerous on a live stage stage. Shocking!

* Gibson Ultima + 57 Princeton + SM 57
* T1® Preset
** Electric Guitars
** Miked Amp w/ SM 57
</td>
<td valign="top">
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/4/48/UltimaPrinceton.jpg" rel="shadowbox"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/4/48/UltimaPrinceton.jpg" style="width:200px" alt="Gibson Ultima and Princeton">
</html>

</td>
</tr></table>

===== Odyssey 500 / 600 =====
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/88/Odyssey500600.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title="Odyssey 600 and 500"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/8/88/Odyssey500600.jpg" style="width:400px" alt="Odyssey 600 and 500" ></a>
</html>



===== Artisan / Carvin =====
<table><tr>
<td valign="top">
It's been a very long time since I fired up my [[{{PAGENAME}}#Carvin Quad-X Amp|Carvin Quad-X Amp]]. I used to run it through a stereo Mosvalve 500 into a Boogie 2x12 or 802s believe it or not.

Recently I ran a 77 Gibson Artisan into the Quad-X into the T1® to my Model II with 2 x B1s. Awesome.

* 4 channels - no waiting
* 5 effects loops
* 9 tubes
* Cabinet voicing
* Noise gate on first stage of preamp

Mine (yes of course I have two) are circa 1992. Discontinued around 1994. Some folks are still wondering why.

*I ran this into T1® Channel 4 using the Preset
** Category: Electric Guitars
** Preset: Gibson Les Paul

The Artisan also known as the Hearts and Flowers Les Paul is heavy, 12 pounds at least. Only to be worn with a neoprene strap for sure. We get Guitars for all kinds of reasons. I have no *good* reason for having this one but there is a lot of sentimental significance to it. So it's here to stay.
</td>
<td valign="top">
<html>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/index.php?title=Carvin_Quad-X_Amp" rel="shadowbox"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/d/d1/CarvinQuad-X.jpg"></a>
<br>
<a href="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/02/LesPaulArtisan.jpg" rel="shadowbox" title="Gibson Artisan / Les Paul Hearts and Flowers"><img src="http://toonz.ca/bose/wiki/images/0/02/LesPaulArtisan.jpg" style="width:150px"></a>
</html>

[http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6366055944/m/6471040445?r=3441050645#3441050645 Live discussion on the Message Board]

</td>
</tr></table>

===== Kemper Profiling Amp =====
The Kemper Profiling Amp is second only to the {{L1}} as a technology that has transformed the way I play music.
[[File:Kemper Profiler Stage.jpg|link=https://www.kemper-amps.com/stage|400px|right|Kemper Profiler Stage]]
[[File:KemperProfilingAmpWhite800x500.jpg|link=http://www.kemper-amps.com/|350px |Kemper Profiling Amp]]

I got the Kemper Profiler Stage (right) for outdoor battery-powered gigs. See [[Portable Power Stations]] for more details.

===== Old School =====
====== ST Mighty Rack======
Before the Kemper Profiling Amp I used to say, "When I want the absolute drop dead best electric sound I can muster I use this." Now I use the Kemper. It's lighter.

[[File:STMightyRack.png|link=ST Mighty Rack|600px|ST Mighty Rack]]

For more details please see: [[ST Mighty Rack]]

====== Carvin Quad-X Amp ======
For four straight ahead channels and all tube sound I sometimes use the Carvin Quad-X Amp. Despite the name, it is a preamp - all tubes. ( 12AX7s) and it came with a gigantic foot switch.

[[File:92 quadxamp-small.jpg|link=Carvin Quad-X Amp|600px]]

For more details please see: [[Carvin Quad-X Amp]]

====== Mesa/Boogie V-Twin ======
For traveling light (and backup almost always) I used to carry the Mesa/Boogie V-Twin.


[[File:Mesa Boogie V-Twin mini.gif|link=Mesa/Boogie V-Twin|270px|Mesa/Boogie V-Twin]]

For more details please see: [http://www.mesaboogie.com/Product_Info/Out_of%20_Production/V-Twin/v-twin.html Mesa Boogie V-Twin]

===== Virtual Guitar - Roland VG-99, VG-88 & VG-8 =====
When I want a huge palette of sounds that extends beyond traditional guitar then I use [http://www.roland.com/products/en/VG-99/ Roland VG-99],

[[Image:Vg-99top.jpg|400px|Roland VG-99]] <html><img src="http://toonz.ca/guitars/images/semis/pr002.jpg" style="float:right;height=200px"></html>

and occasionally the older VG-88 or VG-8.

[[Image:Gibson80p33.jpg|300px|right|Gibson ES Artist]]
[[Image:Roland VG-88.jpg|400px|Roland VG-88 Version 2]]<br />[http://www.roland.com/products/en/VG-88_Version_2/ Details]

I have a Roland GK2 pickup mounted on my [[Gibson ES Artist]] (blasphemy?). I run that to the VG-88 and then to the T1® with using one of the following Presets:

* Utility Flat
* Prerecorded Music / Low Volume
* Prerecorded Music / High Volume

If you are familiar with the GK2/3 pickups you know that you can also run the electric guitar sound direct to the VG-88. I run that to a separate T1® Channel and use one of these Presets:
* Electric Guitars / Miked Amp w/SM57
* Electric Guitars / Miked Amp w/e609
* Electric Guitars / General Direct

I don't feel as though I have fully explored the VG-88 so the VG-99 is on the back burner for now.

In case you are wondering, I normally run mono. Stereo sounds great but for me, there is not enough benefit to warrant bringing two L1®s to run stereo.

==== Acoustic Guitar ====
[[Image:Larrivee150.png|thumb|right|Larrivée C10-bz]][[File:C10Morgan.jpg|300px|Larrivée C10 BZ and Morgan Concert Cutaway]]


{{:Larrivee & Morgan T1® Settings}}
[[Larrivée Guitars|Larrivée]] with [http://www.lrbaggs.com/html/products/systems_imix.shtml L.R. Baggs iMix no-cut] pickup system. I just had this installed because I wanted to start playing this instrument at live gigs.
* {{T1 no link}} Preset
** Category: L.R. Baggs / Preset: iMix

==== Microphone ====
===== Condenser Microphone =====
[[Image:Kms105Thumb.jpg|100px|right]] Neumann KMS 105
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Neumann KMS 105
*Model I / Classic
** #12 KMS 105

===== Dynamic Microphones =====
====== Sennheiser MD 441 ======
[[File:Sennheiser MD 441 vertical.jpg|50px|right|link=Sennheiser MD 441]]
[[Sennheiser MD 441]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Flat, Vocal zEQ OR<br>Sennheiser MD 431-II

====== Sennheiser MD 445 ======
[[File:Sennheiser MD 445.jpg|50px|right|link=Sennheiser MD 445]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Flat, Vocal zEQ OR<br>Sennheiser e 855 OR<br>Sennheiser MD 431-II

===== Headworn Microphone =====
Crown CM311a [[Image:Cm311a-2.gif|right]]
*Category: Vocal Mics
*Preset: Headworn Mics
*Model I / Classic
** #02 Headworn Microphones

==== Vocal Processor / Guitar Effects ====
For gigs in really tight places I have been using the [http://www.tc-helicon.com/products/voicelive-play-gtx TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX] since mid-2012. {{#img: image=Voicelive-play-gtx_top.jpg |page=TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX to Compact| width=150px |title=TC-Helicon VoiceLive Play GTX }}. This unit was replaced by the TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3.

In January 2014 the
[http://www.tc-helicon.com/products/voicelive-3 TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3] was released and I've been experimenting with that. {{#img: image=Tch-voicelive-3-floor.jpg |page=TC-Helicon_VoiceLive_3_to_Compact| width=300px |title=TC-Helicon VoiceLive 3}}

The big appeal for me was the guitar amp emulations, looper, and ''adaptive tone'' features. I haven't used the harmony features. The small form-factor was a big part of the decision to use these.

Update: I found that I wasn't the vocal features. I got the Kemper Profiling Amp and these were so much better than the TC-Helicon guitar amp emulations, so I stopped using the latter. And finally, I had planned to use the looper as a practice tool, and for capturing song ideas. In the end it was simpler to capture the ideas directly to the computer using the T1® USB interface and some recording software. The VoiceLive 3 has left the building.

== Doing Sound ==
Doing Sound - or "Being the Sound Guy" was never on my list of things to accomplish.

If someone were to ask me how to use the L1®s to provide sound reinforcement for live musicians I would insist that s/he watch three video presentations before doing anything else.

* [[The L1® Approach and the History Of Amplification]]
* [[Clifford Henricksen Introduces the L1®]]
* [[Cliff Goodwin|Playing better with the L1® System - Cliff Goodwin]]

Then I would offer these gig reports of four of the shows where I supported several acts crossing a stage using multiple L1®s at the back of the stage.

* [[Gig Report / 8 Live Acts 7 Hours]]
* [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6806048934/m/237109823 Lots of acts: Lots of L1®s]
* [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/6806048934/m/686106993 Butting Heads over the Sound - Taking One for the Team]
* [http://shadowtoonz.wordpress.com/2006/03/27/but-i-never-wanted-to-be-the-sound-guy/ But I Never Wanted To Be the Sound Guy]

And some notes about working with performers.
[[Introducing Performers to the Bose System]]

== History ==
=== First Post on the Message Board ===
Just in case the site gets reorganized and we lose it here is [http://bose.infopop.cc/eve/forums/a/tpc/f/4806048934/m/279101525?r=370107355#370107355 my first post on the message board].
<blockquote>
:I was there on Thursday (had the flu and very nearly didn't go).

:Ended up sitting about 5 feet in front of Tony Sarno (I was in the front row). I was blown away without being blown away. If you ever get a chance to sit that close to a band running PASs you that bizarre statement will make sense.

:Had a great chat with Tony and Wolf after the show.

:Friday morning as soon as L&M (the store that sponsored the show) opened, I picked up my PAS. (one bass module)

:Since I'm under the weather, I took the rest of the day to get to know the unit. Good times.

:Get my first chance to try it out live tonight.

:Many many thanks to all the people at Bose who made the investment to travel to Canada.

:I was somewhat taken aback that Bose would make so large an investment (you sent what - 10 people including the band?)

:Tony, if you happen to see this, I'll send you the information about the McIntyre amp later today.

:Wolfe, if you happen to see this, I'm the guy with the Musicman EVH and the PRSs.

:I'll post more about how I intend to use it and some questions in the other forums.
</blockquote>

----
[[Category:Pioneer]]
[[Category:ST]]

Gibson Howard Roberts Artist

2026-06-17T23:30:50Z

ST:

<div class="tocdiv">
<div>__TOC__</div>
<div><h2>Introduction</h2>

[[File:Gibson Howard Roberts Portrait.jpg|200px|right]]

Gibson’s endorsement with jazz guitarist Howard Roberts began in the mid-1960s with the introduction of the Epiphone Howard Roberts – a unique 16” cutaway model with a pointy Florentine cut-away, oval sound hole, and carved top. A short-lived model, the original Howard Roberts was discontinued in 1969 along with all other USA-made Epiphone models. In 1974 Gibson brought back the Howard Roberts model with some redesign and new branding as the Howard Roberts Custom. The Artist is essentially the same guitar as a Custom, but with upgraded gold hardware, an ebony fingerboard and a different tailpiece name-badge. It features a laminate maple body, multi-ply bindings, slotted block fretboard inlays, and a decidedly Epiphone headstock design, complete with floral / vine inlays.

Low C neck carve with 1-11/16” nut width, 25.4” scale. Figured maple neck, Grover Rotomatic tuners.
</div>
</div>

[[File:Howard Roberts Artist Headstock.jpg|Howard Roberts Artist Headstock.jpg|right]]

Gibson manufactured the Howard Roberts Custom between 1973 and 1981. Designed for jazz session guitarist Howard Roberts (who recorded the themes for the Munsters, the Twilight Zone and many other TV classics), this signature model was originally built as an Epiphone in the ’60s. In the ’70s, Gibson made two versions of this guitar, the Custom and the Artist. The two were essentially the same with a distinct oval sound hole, but the Custom featured a Rosewood instead of ebony fingerboard and chrome hardware.

Featured on untold thousands of major studio recordings, movie and TV soundtracks as both a sideman and soloist, the late Howard Roberts was almost surely one of the most prolifically recorded jazz guitarists of all time. Like his contemporary Johnny Smith, Roberts also consulted in the creation of a number of technically innovative guitars.

An instrument as versatile as its celebrated creator, the Howard Roberts Model was introduced by Gibson under its Epiphone label in 1965. Made in Kalamazoo, this original guitar combined an arched 16″ Florentine cutaway body with a unique oval soundhole, a design with roots in Orville Gibson’s very earliest guitars. With its long-scale neck, the Howard Roberts also revived the celebrated vine peghead inlay of the prewar Epiphone Deluxe.

The Epiphone Howard Roberts was discontinued by 1968, but revived under the Gibson logo in 1970. A full-sized floating humbucking pickup was produced for this model alone, and unique separate treble and bass tone controls. Three years later, Gibson premiered this version of the model, the Howard Roberts Custom. Produced in limited numbers, the Howard Roberts Custom was offered for less than a decade.
[[File:Howard Roberts Artist Specifications.jpg|right]]
Features –

Body size at lower bout: 16″. Scale length: 25 1/2″ Nut Width: 1 11/16″

Finish: Wine Red finish, nitrocellulose lacquer

Materials: Seven-ply bound figured maple body; three piece flame maple neck; solid rosewood fingerboard; ornate NY Epi Deluxe style peghead vine inlay, Gibson peghead logo, and split block pearl fingerboard inlays.

Hardware: includes custom trapeze tailpiece; original compensated adjustable ebony bridge with mother of pearl foot inlay; unique full-sized original floating pickup; master volume with separate treble and bass tone controls; original black barrel knobs.

This specific model:
Made in the Kalamazoo Plant, MI, USA
<br>on December 13th, 1977
<br>Production Number: 14

[[File:Gibson Howard Roberts gib78p23.jpg]]

[[File:Howard Roberts Artist body.jpg]]

[[File:Howard Roberts Artist Tailpiece.jpg]]

[[Media:Gibson 1978 Catalog 4.pdf]]

<html>
<iframe width="560" height="315" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/QcMMeqrl10A?start=214" title="YouTube video player" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture" allowfullscreen></iframe>

</html>

----
[[Category:Guitar]]
[[Category:ST]]

Parker P8 EN Guitar

2026-06-06T14:20:40Z

ST:

<table><tr>
<td valign="top" width="250">__TOC__</td>
<td valign="top">
This is what I am using with my {{Compact}}

[[Image:ParkerP8EnFront.jpg|400px|right|Parker P8 EN front view]]

[http://www.parkerguitars.com/Event-Series/ Parker P8 EN] Event Series

</td>
</tr></table>

=== General Description ===
Parker's first acoustic guitar features a solid cedar top, rosewood binding, solid flame maple back & flame maple sides. It has a mahogany neck with ebony microdot inlaid fingerboard & bridge. Electronics are a Fishman® hum canceling pickup combined with their Acoustic Matrix undersaddle pickup. 1/4" and XLR outputs are provided.

Introduced: January 2006

=== Features ===
* Solid Cedar top with Rosewood binding.
* Solid Flame Maple back. Flame Maple sides. Rosewood binding.
* Bass balanced Ebony bridge with compensated bone saddle.
* Mahogany neck, microdot inlaid Ebony fingerboard, zero fret, Rosewood capped headstock.
* Fishman® hum canceling pickup combined with Acoustic Matrix Undersaddle pickup.
* 1/4" and XLR mono/stereo outputs.
* Grover Sta-Tite (97 series) gold machine heads - 14:1

=== Controls ===
It is great having these controls right on the guitar.

* Top mounted volume control
* Controls: magnetic/piezo blend, bass & treble cut/boost.

[[Image:ParkerP8EnControl.jpg|Parker P8 EN Controls]]

=== Electronics ===
* Mag. Pickups: Exclusive Fishman® Blender System
* Mag. Config: 1 under saddle pickup / 1 exclusive Rare Earth®
* Mag. PU Select:Blend option

* Piezo System: Fishman® Acoustic Matrix® Undersaddle pickup

* PreAmp/Mixer: Hum cancelling neck position Fishman® complimented with a Fishman® Acoustic Matrix® Undersaddle pickup

* Other Controls:
Top mounted master volume, magnetic/piezo blend, independent boost/cut style bass and treble controls.

* Output: 1/4" and XLR mono/stereo

[[Image:ParkerP8EnBack.jpg|Parker P8 EN Back - Flamed Maple with Rosewood Binding]]

=== Specifications ===

P8E
Tones/Sounds:
Bold sounds of cedar and flame maple yeilding bright, compressed, balanced tones capable of cutting through an ensemble mix.

==== Body ====

Wood:
Solid Cedar top with Rosewood binding

==== Construction ====
Solid Flame Maple back and Laminated Flame Maple sides, Rosewood Binding

Finish: Polyurethane

Bridge: Bass balanced bridge with compensated bone saddle

==== Neck ====
Wood: Mahogany with rosewood capped headstock

Neck Design: 5 piece construction

Neck-Body Joint: Dove-tail style

Scale: 25.5"

Number of Frets: 19 Frets

Fret Material: Nickel S

Fret Size: .045" high, .095" wide

Fret Board: Ebony fingerboard with microdot inlays

Fretboard Shape: 10"-13" conical form

Neck Shape: Width: regular, Thickness: regular

Body Length: 19.5"

Lower Bout Width: 15.0"

Upper Bout Width 11.25

Waist Width: 9.5"

Body Depth: (neck block): 3.5"

Finish: Polyurethane

Nut: Bone

Nut Width: 1.69"

String Spacing: 2.14"

Truss Rod: Lightweight steel

Tuners: Grover® Sta-Tite (97 series) gold machine heads - 14:1

=== Miscellaneous ===

Weight:
4 1/2 pounds

Strings:
Vinci .012" - .053"

Case/Bag: Parker Hardshell Case

----
[[Category:ST]]
[[Category:Compact]]
[[Category:Guitar]]

Hamer Studio Custom GATC

2026-05-30T02:00:22Z

ST:

Hamer Sunburst Studio Custom GATC


[http://www.hamerguitars.com/?fa=detail&mid=392 Hamer Studio Custom (GATC)]

[[File:Hamer01.jpg]]

[[File:Hamer02.jpg]]

If you look closely, you'll see that this guitar has a bound headstock. This tiny detail sets it apart from the production versions of this guitar.

I got my Hamer Sunburst Studio GATC in 1991-ish, and played it a lot. Unfortunately, it got damaged, so I shipped it back to Hamer Guitars for repair. About four months later, I got a phone call from none other than [https://dantzig.com/workshop/who-i-am/ Jol Dantzig]. He was very apologetic because, somehow, someone had misinterpreted the damage as a factory blemish. Hamer didn't sell "B" stock. Their practice was to crush substandard guitars. He was calling to tell me that my guitar had been crushed. He said that he had inspected the neck and could see that I had loved and played that guitar a lot. He offered to make me a new one and asked if there were any special features that I'd like. The only thing I wanted was a bound headstock to go with the bound neck.

Jol said he would go down to the wood room and pick something special for me. He warned me it would take a while to make the new guitar because they were a small factory making handmade instruments, but promised me it would be worth the wait. It took over a year, but this stunning guitar was everything Jol said it would be. As a tribute to the first one, Jol stamped it with the original serial number.

[https://www.hamerfanclub.com/494-2/ History of the Hamer Sunburst]

----
[[Category:ST]]
[[Category:Guitar]]
[[Category:Hamer]]

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

2026-05-24T17:23:33Z

ST: /* Overview */

== Overview ==
This is applicable to the Sony A1 II (but not A1). It may be applicable to other newer models, when used with the Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS.

The Sony FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS includes a Function Ring near the front of the lens. Sony officially documents this ring as supporting:
* Power Focus
* APS‑C / Full Frame toggle

However, the lens also supports an *undocumented third mode*: (not mentioned in the [https://www.sony.com/electronics/support/res/manuals/5054/9160c8ce0087829b9805932cfbe6608c/50541710M.pdf FE300 F2.8 GM OSS Operating Guide])

<big>Preset Focus</big> — allowing the user to ''store'' and ''instantly recall'' a focus distance.

This feature behaves similarly to the Focus Preset system found on the FE 400mm F2.8 GM and FE 600mm F4 GM, but is implemented through the Function Ring instead of a dedicated switch.
[[File:Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls.png|thumb|'''Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls''']]
This article explains how to enable the feature and how to use it in the field.

== Enabling Preset Focus on the Function Ring ==
The Preset Focus mode is activated through the camera menus, not the lens switches.

=== Steps ===
# On the camera body, open the '''Setup Menu'''.
# Navigate to:
#*Setup <br>→ Operation Customize <br>→ Dial Customize <br>→ '''Function Ring (Lens)''' ← choose this <br> (Menu names may vary slightly depending on camera model.)
# Select '''Preset Focus''' from the available options:
#* Power Focus (default)
#* APS‑C / Full Frame
#* '''Preset Focus''' ← choose this

Once selected, the Function Ring on the lens will operate in Preset Focus mode.

== How Preset Focus Works ==
Preset Focus mode gives the Function Ring two behaviours:

* **Turn + Hold** → Saves (registers) the current focus distance
* **Turn briefly** → Recalls the previously saved focus distance

The recall is nearly instantaneous and works in AF‑C, AF‑S, and MF.

When saving a preset, the camera will display a brief on‑screen message such as:
''Preset Focus / Zoom Position Set''

== Setting a Preset Focus Distance ==
To store a focus distance:

# Aim the camera at the subject or area you want to store.
# Use AF or MF to achieve accurate focus.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring for about one second.
# Wait for the on‑screen confirmation message.

The current focus distance is now stored until you overwrite it with a new one.

== Recalling a Preset Focus Distance ==
To instantly return to the stored distance:

# **Turn the Function Ring briefly** (a short twist in either direction).
# The lens will snap to the saved focus distance.

This works even if:
* You are currently focused at a completely different distance
* AF‑C is active
* The subject is moving
* The scene has low contrast or clutter

== Overwriting the Preset ==
To update the stored distance:

# Focus on the new target distance.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring again.
# Wait for the confirmation message.

The previous preset is replaced.

== Practical Applications ==
=== Birds in Flight (e.g., swallows) ===
* Pre‑focus on a predictable flight lane or feeding zone.
* Track birds freely.
* Instantly snap back to the lane when a bird enters it.
* Avoids AF hunting in empty sky.

=== Perched Birds in Clutter (e.g., eagles in branches) ===
* Store the exact distance of the perch.
* If AF jumps to foreground branches, recall instantly.
* Useful when the subject is partially obscured.

=== Low‑Light or Pre‑Sunrise Shooting ===
* AF may hesitate in dim light.
* Preset Focus ensures instant reacquisition of a known distance.

=== Repetitive Behaviour Patterns ===
* Herons returning to the same landing spot
* Cranes walking predictable paths
* Ducks surfacing in the same area

Preset Focus allows you to prepare for the moment before it happens.

== Notes and Limitations ==
* Only one preset distance can be stored at a time.
* The feature is camera‑driven, not lens‑driven, which is why it is not documented in the lens manual.
* Works with or without teleconverters.
* Works in all AF modes.
* Does not interfere with OSS or focus limiter settings.

== Summary ==
The FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II includes a powerful but undocumented **Preset Focus** capability accessible through the Function Ring.
Once enabled, it provides:
* Instant recall of a stored focus distance
* Fast reacquisition in challenging conditions
* Behaviour similar to the 400mm/600mm GM Focus Preset system
* Significant benefits for wildlife and action photography

This feature can dramatically improve keeper rates in situations where subjects move unpredictably or where AF may struggle with clutter or low contrast.

----
[[Category:Sony]]
[[Category:Lens]]

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

2026-05-24T17:10:03Z

ST:

== Overview ==
The Sony FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS includes a Function Ring near the front of the lens. Sony officially documents this ring as supporting:
* Power Focus
* APS‑C / Full Frame toggle

However, the lens also supports an **undocumented third mode**: (not mentioned in the [https://www.sony.com/electronics/support/res/manuals/5054/9160c8ce0087829b9805932cfbe6608c/50541710M.pdf FE300 F2.8 GM OSS Operating Guide])

<big>Preset Focus</big> — allowing the user to ''store'' and ''instantly recall'' a focus distance.

This feature behaves similarly to the Focus Preset system found on the FE 400mm F2.8 GM and FE 600mm F4 GM, but is implemented through the Function Ring instead of a dedicated switch.
[[File:Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls.png|thumb|'''Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls''']]
This article explains how to enable the feature and how to use it in the field.

== Enabling Preset Focus on the Function Ring ==
The Preset Focus mode is activated through the camera menus, not the lens switches.

=== Steps ===
# On the camera body, open the '''Setup Menu'''.
# Navigate to:
#*Setup <br>→ Operation Customize <br>→ Dial Customize <br>→ '''Function Ring (Lens)''' ← choose this <br> (Menu names may vary slightly depending on camera model.)
# Select '''Preset Focus''' from the available options:
#* Power Focus (default)
#* APS‑C / Full Frame
#* '''Preset Focus''' ← choose this

Once selected, the Function Ring on the lens will operate in Preset Focus mode.

== How Preset Focus Works ==
Preset Focus mode gives the Function Ring two behaviours:

* **Turn + Hold** → Saves (registers) the current focus distance
* **Turn briefly** → Recalls the previously saved focus distance

The recall is nearly instantaneous and works in AF‑C, AF‑S, and MF.

When saving a preset, the camera will display a brief on‑screen message such as:
''Preset Focus / Zoom Position Set''

== Setting a Preset Focus Distance ==
To store a focus distance:

# Aim the camera at the subject or area you want to store.
# Use AF or MF to achieve accurate focus.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring for about one second.
# Wait for the on‑screen confirmation message.

The current focus distance is now stored until you overwrite it with a new one.

== Recalling a Preset Focus Distance ==
To instantly return to the stored distance:

# **Turn the Function Ring briefly** (a short twist in either direction).
# The lens will snap to the saved focus distance.

This works even if:
* You are currently focused at a completely different distance
* AF‑C is active
* The subject is moving
* The scene has low contrast or clutter

== Overwriting the Preset ==
To update the stored distance:

# Focus on the new target distance.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring again.
# Wait for the confirmation message.

The previous preset is replaced.

== Practical Applications ==
=== Birds in Flight (e.g., swallows) ===
* Pre‑focus on a predictable flight lane or feeding zone.
* Track birds freely.
* Instantly snap back to the lane when a bird enters it.
* Avoids AF hunting in empty sky.

=== Perched Birds in Clutter (e.g., eagles in branches) ===
* Store the exact distance of the perch.
* If AF jumps to foreground branches, recall instantly.
* Useful when the subject is partially obscured.

=== Low‑Light or Pre‑Sunrise Shooting ===
* AF may hesitate in dim light.
* Preset Focus ensures instant reacquisition of a known distance.

=== Repetitive Behaviour Patterns ===
* Herons returning to the same landing spot
* Cranes walking predictable paths
* Ducks surfacing in the same area

Preset Focus allows you to prepare for the moment before it happens.

== Notes and Limitations ==
* Only one preset distance can be stored at a time.
* The feature is camera‑driven, not lens‑driven, which is why it is not documented in the lens manual.
* Works with or without teleconverters.
* Works in all AF modes.
* Does not interfere with OSS or focus limiter settings.

== Summary ==
The FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II includes a powerful but undocumented **Preset Focus** capability accessible through the Function Ring.
Once enabled, it provides:
* Instant recall of a stored focus distance
* Fast reacquisition in challenging conditions
* Behaviour similar to the 400mm/600mm GM Focus Preset system
* Significant benefits for wildlife and action photography

This feature can dramatically improve keeper rates in situations where subjects move unpredictably or where AF may struggle with clutter or low contrast.

----
[[Category:Sony]]
[[Category:Lens]]

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS

2026-05-24T16:57:45Z

ST: ST moved page Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS to Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

#REDIRECT [[Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus]]

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

2026-05-24T16:57:45Z

ST: ST moved page Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS to Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

== Overview ==
The Sony FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II includes a Function Ring near the front of the lens. Sony officially documents this ring as supporting:
* Power Focus
* APS‑C / Full Frame toggle

However, the lens also supports an **undocumented third mode**: (not mentioned in the [https://www.sony.com/electronics/support/res/manuals/5054/9160c8ce0087829b9805932cfbe6608c/50541710M.pdf FE300 F2.8 GM OSS Operating Guide])

<big>Preset Focus</big> — allowing the user to ''store'' and ''instantly recall'' a focus distance.

This feature behaves similarly to the Focus Preset system found on the FE 400mm F2.8 GM and FE 600mm F4 GM, but is implemented through the Function Ring instead of a dedicated switch.
[[File:Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls.png|thumb|'''Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls''']]
This article explains how to enable the feature and how to use it in the field.

== Enabling Preset Focus on the Function Ring ==
The Preset Focus mode is activated through the camera menus, not the lens switches.

=== Steps ===
# On the camera body, open the '''Setup Menu'''.
# Navigate to:
#*Setup <br>→ Operation Customize <br>→ Dial Customize <br>→ '''Function Ring (Lens)''' ← choose this <br> (Menu names may vary slightly depending on camera model.)
# Select '''Preset Focus''' from the available options:
#* Power Focus (default)
#* APS‑C / Full Frame
#* '''Preset Focus''' ← choose this

Once selected, the Function Ring on the lens will operate in Preset Focus mode.

== How Preset Focus Works ==
Preset Focus mode gives the Function Ring two behaviours:

* **Turn + Hold** → Saves (registers) the current focus distance
* **Turn briefly** → Recalls the previously saved focus distance

The recall is nearly instantaneous and works in AF‑C, AF‑S, and MF.

When saving a preset, the camera will display a brief on‑screen message such as:
''Preset Focus / Zoom Position Set''

== Setting a Preset Focus Distance ==
To store a focus distance:

# Aim the camera at the subject or area you want to store.
# Use AF or MF to achieve accurate focus.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring for about one second.
# Wait for the on‑screen confirmation message.

The current focus distance is now stored until you overwrite it with a new one.

== Recalling a Preset Focus Distance ==
To instantly return to the stored distance:

# **Turn the Function Ring briefly** (a short twist in either direction).
# The lens will snap to the saved focus distance.

This works even if:
* You are currently focused at a completely different distance
* AF‑C is active
* The subject is moving
* The scene has low contrast or clutter

== Overwriting the Preset ==
To update the stored distance:

# Focus on the new target distance.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring again.
# Wait for the confirmation message.

The previous preset is replaced.

== Practical Applications ==
=== Birds in Flight (e.g., swallows) ===
* Pre‑focus on a predictable flight lane or feeding zone.
* Track birds freely.
* Instantly snap back to the lane when a bird enters it.
* Avoids AF hunting in empty sky.

=== Perched Birds in Clutter (e.g., eagles in branches) ===
* Store the exact distance of the perch.
* If AF jumps to foreground branches, recall instantly.
* Useful when the subject is partially obscured.

=== Low‑Light or Pre‑Sunrise Shooting ===
* AF may hesitate in dim light.
* Preset Focus ensures instant reacquisition of a known distance.

=== Repetitive Behaviour Patterns ===
* Herons returning to the same landing spot
* Cranes walking predictable paths
* Ducks surfacing in the same area

Preset Focus allows you to prepare for the moment before it happens.

== Notes and Limitations ==
* Only one preset distance can be stored at a time.
* The feature is camera‑driven, not lens‑driven, which is why it is not documented in the lens manual.
* Works with or without teleconverters.
* Works in all AF modes.
* Does not interfere with OSS or focus limiter settings.

== Summary ==
The FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II includes a powerful but undocumented **Preset Focus** capability accessible through the Function Ring.
Once enabled, it provides:
* Instant recall of a stored focus distance
* Fast reacquisition in challenging conditions
* Behaviour similar to the 400mm/600mm GM Focus Preset system
* Significant benefits for wildlife and action photography

This feature can dramatically improve keeper rates in situations where subjects move unpredictably or where AF may struggle with clutter or low contrast.

----
[[Category:Sony]]
[[Category:Lens]]

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

2026-05-24T16:56:34Z

ST: /* Enabling Preset Focus on the Function Ring */

File:Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls.png

2026-05-24T16:55:29Z

ST:

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Buttons and Controls

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

2026-05-24T16:52:35Z

ST: formatting

== Overview ==
The Sony FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II includes a Function Ring near the front of the lens. Sony officially documents this ring as supporting:
* Power Focus
* APS‑C / Full Frame toggle

However, the lens also supports an **undocumented third mode**: (not mentioned in the [https://www.sony.com/electronics/support/res/manuals/5054/9160c8ce0087829b9805932cfbe6608c/50541710M.pdf FE300 F2.8 GM OSS Operating Guide])

<big>Preset Focus</big> — allowing the user to ''store'' and ''instantly recall'' a focus distance.

This feature behaves similarly to the Focus Preset system found on the FE 400mm F2.8 GM and FE 600mm F4 GM, but is implemented through the Function Ring instead of a dedicated switch.

This article explains how to enable the feature and how to use it in the field.

== Enabling Preset Focus on the Function Ring ==
The Preset Focus mode is activated through the camera menus, not the lens switches.

=== Steps ===
# On the camera body, open the '''Setup Menu'''.
# Navigate to:
#*Setup <br>→ Operation Customize <br>→ Dial Customize <br>→ '''Function Ring (Lens)''' ← choose this <br> (Menu names may vary slightly depending on camera model.)
# Select '''Preset Focus''' from the available options:
#* Power Focus (default)
#* APS‑C / Full Frame
#* '''Preset Focus''' ← choose this

Once selected, the Function Ring on the lens will operate in Preset Focus mode.

== How Preset Focus Works ==
Preset Focus mode gives the Function Ring two behaviours:

* **Turn + Hold** → Saves (registers) the current focus distance
* **Turn briefly** → Recalls the previously saved focus distance

The recall is nearly instantaneous and works in AF‑C, AF‑S, and MF.

When saving a preset, the camera will display a brief on‑screen message such as:
''Preset Focus / Zoom Position Set''

== Setting a Preset Focus Distance ==
To store a focus distance:

# Aim the camera at the subject or area you want to store.
# Use AF or MF to achieve accurate focus.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring for about one second.
# Wait for the on‑screen confirmation message.

The current focus distance is now stored until you overwrite it with a new one.

== Recalling a Preset Focus Distance ==
To instantly return to the stored distance:

# **Turn the Function Ring briefly** (a short twist in either direction).
# The lens will snap to the saved focus distance.

This works even if:
* You are currently focused at a completely different distance
* AF‑C is active
* The subject is moving
* The scene has low contrast or clutter

== Overwriting the Preset ==
To update the stored distance:

# Focus on the new target distance.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring again.
# Wait for the confirmation message.

The previous preset is replaced.

== Practical Applications ==
=== Birds in Flight (e.g., swallows) ===
* Pre‑focus on a predictable flight lane or feeding zone.
* Track birds freely.
* Instantly snap back to the lane when a bird enters it.
* Avoids AF hunting in empty sky.

=== Perched Birds in Clutter (e.g., eagles in branches) ===
* Store the exact distance of the perch.
* If AF jumps to foreground branches, recall instantly.
* Useful when the subject is partially obscured.

=== Low‑Light or Pre‑Sunrise Shooting ===
* AF may hesitate in dim light.
* Preset Focus ensures instant reacquisition of a known distance.

=== Repetitive Behaviour Patterns ===
* Herons returning to the same landing spot
* Cranes walking predictable paths
* Ducks surfacing in the same area

Preset Focus allows you to prepare for the moment before it happens.

== Notes and Limitations ==
* Only one preset distance can be stored at a time.
* The feature is camera‑driven, not lens‑driven, which is why it is not documented in the lens manual.
* Works with or without teleconverters.
* Works in all AF modes.
* Does not interfere with OSS or focus limiter settings.

== Summary ==
The FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II includes a powerful but undocumented **Preset Focus** capability accessible through the Function Ring.
Once enabled, it provides:
* Instant recall of a stored focus distance
* Fast reacquisition in challenging conditions
* Behaviour similar to the 400mm/600mm GM Focus Preset system
* Significant benefits for wildlife and action photography

This feature can dramatically improve keeper rates in situations where subjects move unpredictably or where AF may struggle with clutter or low contrast.

----
[[Category:Sony]]
[[Category:Lens]]

Sony FE 300 F2.8 GM OSS Preset Focus

2026-05-24T16:49:02Z

ST: Created page with "== Overview == The Sony **FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II** includes a Function Ring near the front of the lens. Sony officially documents this ring as supporting: * Power Focus * APS‑C / Full Frame toggle However, the lens also supports an **undocumented third mode**: (not mentioned in the [https://www.sony.com/electronics/support/res/manuals/5054/9160c8ce0087829b9805932cfbe6608c/50541710M.pdf FE300 F2.8 GM OSS Operating Guide]) * **Preset Focus** — allowing the user..."

== Overview ==
The Sony **FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II** includes a Function Ring near the front of the lens.
Sony officially documents this ring as supporting:
* Power Focus
* APS‑C / Full Frame toggle

However, the lens also supports an **undocumented third mode**: (not mentioned in the [https://www.sony.com/electronics/support/res/manuals/5054/9160c8ce0087829b9805932cfbe6608c/50541710M.pdf FE300 F2.8 GM OSS Operating Guide])
* **Preset Focus** — allowing the user to *store* and *instantly recall* a focus distance.

This feature behaves similarly to the Focus Preset system found on the FE 400mm F2.8 GM and FE 600mm F4 GM, but is implemented through the Function Ring instead of a dedicated switch.

This article explains how to enable the feature and how to use it in the field.

== Enabling Preset Focus on the Function Ring ==
The Preset Focus mode is activated through the camera menus, not the lens switches.

=== Steps ===
# On the camera body, open the '''Setup Menu'''.
# Navigate to:
#*Setup <br>→ Operation Customize <br>→ Dial Customize <br>→ '''Function Ring (Lens)''' ← choose this <br> (Menu names may vary slightly depending on camera model.)
# Select '''Preset Focus''' from the available options:
#* Power Focus (default)
#* APS‑C / Full Frame
#* '''Preset Focus''' ← choose this

Once selected, the Function Ring on the lens will operate in Preset Focus mode.

== How Preset Focus Works ==
Preset Focus mode gives the Function Ring two behaviours:

* **Turn + Hold** → Saves (registers) the current focus distance
* **Turn briefly** → Recalls the previously saved focus distance

The recall is nearly instantaneous and works in AF‑C, AF‑S, and MF.

When saving a preset, the camera will display a brief on‑screen message such as:
''Preset Focus / Zoom Position Set''

== Setting a Preset Focus Distance ==
To store a focus distance:

# Aim the camera at the subject or area you want to store.
# Use AF or MF to achieve accurate focus.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring for about one second.
# Wait for the on‑screen confirmation message.

The current focus distance is now stored until you overwrite it with a new one.

== Recalling a Preset Focus Distance ==
To instantly return to the stored distance:

# **Turn the Function Ring briefly** (a short twist in either direction).
# The lens will snap to the saved focus distance.

This works even if:
* You are currently focused at a completely different distance
* AF‑C is active
* The subject is moving
* The scene has low contrast or clutter

== Overwriting the Preset ==
To update the stored distance:

# Focus on the new target distance.
# **Turn and hold** the Function Ring again.
# Wait for the confirmation message.

The previous preset is replaced.

== Practical Applications ==
=== Birds in Flight (e.g., swallows) ===
* Pre‑focus on a predictable flight lane or feeding zone.
* Track birds freely.
* Instantly snap back to the lane when a bird enters it.
* Avoids AF hunting in empty sky.

=== Perched Birds in Clutter (e.g., eagles in branches) ===
* Store the exact distance of the perch.
* If AF jumps to foreground branches, recall instantly.
* Useful when the subject is partially obscured.

=== Low‑Light or Pre‑Sunrise Shooting ===
* AF may hesitate in dim light.
* Preset Focus ensures instant reacquisition of a known distance.

=== Repetitive Behaviour Patterns ===
* Herons returning to the same landing spot
* Cranes walking predictable paths
* Ducks surfacing in the same area

Preset Focus allows you to prepare for the moment before it happens.

== Notes and Limitations ==
* Only one preset distance can be stored at a time.
* The feature is camera‑driven, not lens‑driven, which is why it is not documented in the lens manual.
* Works with or without teleconverters.
* Works in all AF modes.
* Does not interfere with OSS or focus limiter settings.

== Summary ==
The FE 300mm F2.8 GM OSS II includes a powerful but undocumented **Preset Focus** capability accessible through the Function Ring.
Once enabled, it provides:
* Instant recall of a stored focus distance
* Fast reacquisition in challenging conditions
* Behaviour similar to the 400mm/600mm GM Focus Preset system
* Significant benefits for wildlife and action photography

This feature can dramatically improve keeper rates in situations where subjects move unpredictably or where AF may struggle with clutter or low contrast.

----
[[Category:Sony]]
[[Category:Lens]]

Sub1/Sub2

2026-05-17T00:31:27Z

ST:

<html>
<style>
table#comparison {max-width:1366px}
table#comparison td,th {text-align:right;padding:1em;mid-width:100px;}
table#comparison th {font-weight:bold}
table#comparison tr td:first-child {font-weight:bold}

</style>
<style>
table.greyGridTable {
border: 2px solid #FFFFFF;
width: 100%;
text-align: left;
border-collapse: collapse;
}
table.greyGridTable td, table.greyGridTable th {
border: 1px solid #FFFFFF;
padding: 3px 4px;
}
table.greyGridTable tbody td {
font-size: 13px;
color: #000000;
}
table.greyGridTable tr:nth-child(even) {
background: #F4F4F4;
}
table.greyGridTable thead {
background: #FFFFFF;
border-bottom: 4px solid #333333;
}
table.greyGridTable thead th {
font-size: 15px;
font-weight: bold;
color: #000000;
text-align: center;
border-left: 2px solid #333333;
}
table.greyGridTable thead th:first-child {
border-left: none;
}

table.greyGridTable tfoot {
font-size: 14px;
font-weight: bold;
color: #333333;
border-top: 4px solid #333333;
}
table.greyGridTable tfoot td {
font-size: 14px;
}</style>

</html>

[[File:Sub1 Sub2.jpg|link=https://pro.bose.com/en_us/solutions/portable/l1-pro-family/sub1-sub2.html|thumb|Bose Sub1 and Sub2]]
<h3>Introduction</h3>
Introduced: October 2020
<br>First available: January 2021

Use the Sub1 or Sub 2 bass modules with the [[L1 Pro|Bose L1 Pro32]]
* Sub1 creates a compact system (down to 40 Hz)
* Sub2 plays lower and louder (down to 37 Hz)
* Extreme portability using [[{{PAGENAME}}#RaceTrack_Woofer|RaceTrack woofers]]
Use the Sub1 or Sub 2 bass modules with other PA systems (e.g., Bose S1 Pro or third-party systems)

=== Documentation ===
*[[Media:Sub1-Sub2 Owners Guide.pdf|Sub1/Sub2 Owners Guide]]
*[[Media:Sub1-Sub2 Quick Start Guide.pdf|Sub1/Sub2 Quick Start Guide]]
* [https://assets.bose.com/content/dam/Bose_DAM/Web/pro/global/products/portable_PA/sub1_bass_module/downloads/technical_information/tds_sub1_en.pdf Sub1 Technical Data Sheet]
* [https://assets.bose.com/content/dam/Bose_DAM/Web/pro/global/products/portable_PA/sub2_bass_module/downloads/technical_information/tds_sub2_en.pdf Sub2 Technical Data Sheet]



=== Firmware Updates ===
[[File:Sub1 Sub2 io panel USBC.jpg|150px|right|Sub1 Sub2 USB C service port]]
==== Version 5.06 ====
May 26, 2021
* Fixes an issue that allows users to disable Low Power Standby mode.
* Allows wider range of Standby button press lengths when powering on product.
* Implements timed audio output mute when powering on product.
* Updates to green/red signal/clip LED threshold.
==== Installation ====
* Use a USB C cable (click the picture to the right to see where it connects on the Sub)
* Go to http://btu.bose.com using a PC or Mac
* Follow the prompts on the screen
* [https://assets.bose.com/content/dam/Bose_DAM/Web/consumer_electronics/global/products/speakers/l1_pro8/pdf/ig_L1Pro_FW_update_EN.pdf Instructions]

=== Comparisons Sub1/Sub2 Subwoofers ===
{{Sub Comparison}}

=== RaceTrack Woofer===
[[File:Sub RaceTrack12.jpg|left|thumb|RaceTrack Woofer]]

: Unique RaceTrack woofers integrated in the Bose Sub1 and Sub2 modular subwoofers deliver powerful bass, have an optimized center of gravity, and save a lot of space. This slim design means you get the full impact of a conventional subwoofer without the cumbersome size, freeing up room in your vehicle and on the stage, and making every carry in between — home to car, vehicle to venue — much easier. <ref>[https://pro.bose.com/en_us/solutions/portable/l1-pro-family/sub1-sub2.html RaceTrack Woofer] on pro.bose.com</ref>

Although the comparisons are approximate and this assumes that other variables like input power are similar:
*The 7"x13" RaceTrack woofer in the Sub1 is comparable to 12" round driver.
*The 10"x18" RaceTrack woofer is comparable to a 15" round driver.

Note: Both the Sub1 and L1 Pro8 use a 7"x13" RaceTrack woofer.
The L1 Pro8 is rated at 240 watts RMS to the subwoofer. The Sub1 is rated at 480 watts RMS.

<br>

{{Cardioid Subs}}

=== Level Control ===
{{Sub1/Sub2 Level Control}}

<div></div>
=== SubMatch Cable===
{{SubMatch Cable}}

=== Crossover Frequencies ===
[[File:Sub1_Sub2_io_panel.jpg|thumb|Sub io panel]]
* LINE IN EQ set to L1: 200 Hz <br>Use with any full size L1 System)
** This is selected automatically when using the SubMatch cable connection with an L1 Pro32
* S1 Pro: 150 Hz
** Press and hold LINE OUT EQ button for 4 seconds. The HPF LED will illuminate green. To deactivate the S1 Pro EQ, press and hold for
four seconds
*LINE IN EQ set to LPF: 100 Hz<br>Use this with third-party full-range and mid-high speaker systems

=== SubMatch Connection Signal Flow ===
[[File:Sub1 Sub2 io panel.jpg|thumb]]
====L1 Pro 32 SubMatch Output====
* Full range audio signal
* AC Power

====Sub1/Sub2 SubMatch Pass Thru====
* Full range audio signal (unaffected by any settings on the Sub1/Sub2)
* AC Power

====Sub1/Sub2 using a SubMatch port for input====
;LINE IN EQ (LPF or L1)
* The LINE IN EQ is automatically set to '''L1''' regardless of the position of the button

;LINE OUT EQ (FULL RANGE or HPF)
* Line Out 1 LINE OUT EQ is FULL RANGE or HPF depending on the setting of the Line Out EQ button
* Line Out 2 LINE OUT EQ is FULL RANGE or HPF depending on the setting of the Line Out EQ button

=== S1 Pro+ with Sub1 or Sub2 ===
See [[S1 Pro+ with Sub1 or Sub2]]

=== {{S1 Pro}} with Sub1/Sub2 ===
See [[S1 Pro with Sub1 or Sub2]]

=== {{Compact}} with Sub1/Sub2 ===
See [[L1 Compact with Sub1 or Sub2]]

=== Sub2 with Sub1 ===
{{Template:Sub2 with Sub1}}

{{L1 Model II with Sub1/Sub2}}

=== Cooling ===
;Question:
How are the Sub1/Sub2 cooled?
;Answer:
Sub1 and Sub2 have extruded aluminum heat sinks mounted to the backside of the I/O panel. This pulls heat out of the electronics and transfers some to the air moving through the acoustic volume of the sub and helps to cool.<ref>[https://www.facebook.com/groups/BoseL1/permalink/10159635582172446/?comment_id=10159637158957446 Bose Professional]</ref>

=== Running Multiple Subwoofers ===
If you are running two or more subwoofers, you want to read these articles:
* [https://blogs.qsc.com/live-sound/what-does-subwoofers-mutual-coupling-mean/ What does subwoofer mutual coupling mean?]
* [https://www.soundonsound.com/techniques/bass-place Sound on Sound Bass Place]
* [https://www.fulcrum-acoustic.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/10/3_The-Subwoofer-Power-Alley-1.pdf The Subwoofer Power Alley]

{{Comparing L1 Pro Power Stands to Subs}}

== Questions about this article ==
[https://twitter.com/ST_Muso/status/1395188406393655300 Questions about this article?]

</div>
----
[[Category:L1 Pro]]
[[Category:Sub]]
[[Category:S1 Pro]]

L1 Pro Hiss

2026-05-16T11:45:01Z

ST:

{{L1 Pro icon}}
This information applies to all L1 Pro models.

;Some people turn up the inputs 1 and 2 with nothing attached and are concerned about hiss from the system.

<details><summary><big>Do NOT turn up the volume with nothing connected to the inputs</big>. The system is not designed to operate this way, and it serves no purpose.</summary>

:It's not advised to turn up a channel to halfway with nothing plugged into it and NOT mute it. Not with this system, or any PA system. This is not how a PA is used. As has been stated several times on various posts, the Pro32 is a very loud system with an aggressive taper on the first 50% of the volume dial. Digital gain + analog gain working together to provide a smooth taper for mic or line level instruments without having select what type of input source. Noise floor levels are imperceptible when proper gain staging in use, and in the presence of ambient event noise.

Source: [https://www.facebook.com/groups/BoseL1/posts/10159761707557446/?comment_id=10159762725097446&reply_comment_id=10159763243987446 Craig Small - Bose]
</details>

If you turn up an L1 Pro16 channel beyond 1/2 way in a quiet house and relatively no ambient noise: you will hear some noise floor because that setting is LOUD. Do the exact same thing in a club or venue and you will not hear the noise floor. Channels 1 & 2 can accommodate mic level and line level inputs, and do so by intersecting hardware/preamp gain and digital/DSP gain. While no signal is present, you may hear the DSP gain "steps" while increasing or decreasing the volume. But when an audio source is connected, the user hears a smooth, continuous volume taper. This is what matters to the user and to the audience.

Source: [https://www.facebook.com/groups/BoseL1/posts/10160533849937446/?comment_id=10160534431292446 Craig Small - Bose]

;Why doesn't this happen on channel 3?

:Channel 3 is purely line level, so it has less gain. If you're running aux out, I'd recommend going into ch 3

Source: [https://www.facebook.com/groups/BoseL1/posts/10159761707557446?comment_id=10159762725097446&reply_comment_id=10159764452547446 Craig Small - Bose]

{{FAQItem
|question = I get excessive hiss when connecting the LINE OUT from an L1 Pro to a second L1 Pro with an XLR cable
|answer = Connect the first L1 Pro LINE OUT to the second L1 Pro Channel 3 input
The cable: Female XLR to 1/4-inch (6.3mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve cable
For more details see [[L1 Pro Daisy Chain]]
}}

{{FAQItem
|question = I get excessive hiss when connecting a mixer to the L1 Pro Channels 1 or 2 with an XLR cable
|answer = Connect the mixer mono output to the L1 Pro Channel 3 input
The cable: Female XLR to 1/4-inch (6.3mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve cable
For more details see [[Mixer to L1 Pro]]
}}

----
[[Category:L1 Pro]]

L1 Pro Hiss

2026-05-16T11:39:33Z

ST:

{{L1 Pro icon}}
This information applies to all L1 Pro models.

;Some people turn up the inputs 1 and 2 with nothing attached and are concerned about hiss from the system.

:It's not advised to turn up a channel to halfway with nothing plugged into it and NOT mute it. Not with this system, or any PA system. This is not how a PA is used. As has been stated several times on various posts, the Pro32 is a very loud system with an aggressive taper on the first 50% of the volume dial. Digital gain + analog gain working together to provide a smooth taper for mic or line level instruments without having select what type of input source. Noise floor levels are imperceptible when proper gain staging in use, and in the presence of ambient event noise.

Source: [https://www.facebook.com/groups/BoseL1/posts/10159761707557446/?comment_id=10159762725097446&reply_comment_id=10159763243987446 Craig Small - Bose]

If you turn up an L1 Pro16 channel beyond 1/2 way in a quiet house and relatively no ambient noise: you will hear some noise floor because that setting is LOUD. Do the exact same thing in a club or venue and you will not hear the noise floor. Channels 1 & 2 can accommodate mic level and line level inputs, and do so by intersecting hardware/preamp gain and digital/DSP gain. While no signal is present, you may hear the DSP gain "steps" while increasing or decreasing the volume. But when an audio source is connected, the user hears a smooth, continuous volume taper. This is what matters to the user and to the audience.

Source: [https://www.facebook.com/groups/BoseL1/posts/10160533849937446/?comment_id=10160534431292446 Craig Small - Bose]

;Why doesn't this happen on channel 3?

:Channel 3 is purely line level, so it has less gain. If you're running aux out, I'd recommend going into ch 3

Source: [https://www.facebook.com/groups/BoseL1/posts/10159761707557446?comment_id=10159762725097446&reply_comment_id=10159764452547446 Craig Small - Bose]

{{FAQItem
|question = I get excessive hiss when connecting the LINE OUT from an L1 Pro to a second L1 Pro with an XLR cable
|answer = Connect the first L1 Pro LINE OUT to the second L1 Pro Channel 3 input
The cable: Female XLR to 1/4-inch (6.3mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve cable
For more details see [[L1 Pro Daisy Chain]]
}}

{{FAQItem
|question = I get excessive hiss when connecting a mixer to the L1 Pro Channels 1 or 2 with an XLR cable
|answer = Connect the mixer mono output to the L1 Pro Channel 3 input
The cable: Female XLR to 1/4-inch (6.3mm) Tip-Ring-Sleeve cable
For more details see [[Mixer to L1 Pro]]
}}

----
[[Category:L1 Pro]]